File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that...

261
Metalogix ® Content Matrix 8.7 File Share Edition

Transcript of File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that...

Page 1: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

Metalogix® Content Matrix 8.7

File Share Edition

Page 2: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

© 2018 Quest Software Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This guide contains proprietary information protected by copyright. The software described in this guide is

furnished under a software license or nondisclosure agreement. This software may be used or copied only in

accordance with the terms of the applicable agreement. No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted

in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording for any purpose

other than the purchaser’s personal use without the written permission of Quest Software Inc.

The information in this document is provided in connection with Quest Software products. No license, express or

implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection

with the sale of Quest Software products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AS SPECIFIED

IN THE LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR THIS PRODUCT, QUEST SOFTWARE ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER

AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL QUEST SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,

CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,

DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE

USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF QUEST SOFTWARE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Quest Software makes no representations or warranties with respect to the

accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to

specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice. Quest Software does not make any

commitment to update the information contained in this document.

If you have any questions regarding your potential use of this material, contact:

Quest Software Inc.

Attn: LEGAL Dept.

4 Polaris Way

Aliso Viejo, CA 92656

Refer to our Web site (https://www.quest.com) for regional and international office information.

Patents

Quest Software is proud of our advanced technology. Patents and pending patents may apply to this product.

For the most current information about applicable patents for this product, please visit our website at

https://www.quest.com/legal.

Trademarks

Quest, the Quest logo, and Metalogix are trademarks and registered trademarks of Quest Software Inc. and its

affiliates. For a complete list of Quest marks, visit https://www.quest.com/legal/trademark-information.aspx. All

other trademarks and registered trademarks are property of their respective owners.Metalogix® Content

Matrix

Updated October 2018

Version 8.7

Page 3: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

Content Matrix 3

Contents

Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 9

Supported Source Systems ................................................................................................... 9

Supported Target Systems .................................................................................................. 10

Key Features ...................................................................................................................... 10

Product Announcements Splash Screen ................................................................................ 11

Automatic Upgrades ............................................................................................................ 11

Entering the License Key ......................................................................................................... 13

Online Activation ................................................................................................................. 14

Offline Activation ................................................................................................................. 14

Checking the Current Content Matrix Console License ............................................................ 15

Overview of Content Migration ................................................................................................ 16

Introductory Concepts ......................................................................................................... 17

Content Items ..........................................................................................................................................17

Metadata .................................................................................................................................................17

Actions ....................................................................................................................................................21

Content Matrix Console End User Interface ............................................................................. 22

Main (Ribbon) Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 23

Quick Access Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 23

Explorer Control View Tabs ................................................................................................. 24

Explorer View Tab ..................................................................................................................................24

Items View Tab .......................................................................................................................................26

Browser View Tab ..................................................................................................................................28

Jobs List ............................................................................................................................ 29

Using the Connection Search Function .................................................................................. 29

Using Multi-Select ............................................................................................................... 31

Enabling Advanced Mode ........................................................................................................ 33

Enabling and Disabling Optimistic Mode .................................................................................. 34

Connecting to a File System .................................................................................................... 36

Connecting to SharePoint ........................................................................................................ 38

Connecting to a SharePoint Site or Server ............................................................................ 40

Page 4: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

Content Matrix 4

Additional Requirements for O365 Tenant Connections .......................................................... 49

Required Permissions for Connecting to an O365 Tenant .....................................................................49

Specifying the URL to Connect to an O365 Tenant ...............................................................................50

Migrating to O365 Using the Azure Pipeline ........................................................................... 51

Objects Supported by the Azure Pipeline ...............................................................................................51

Connecting with Certificates ................................................................................................. 52

Removing Certificates .............................................................................................................................54

Preparing for Your Migration ................................................................................................... 55

Adding a Filter to a File Share Connection ............................................................................. 55

File System Reporting ......................................................................................................... 57

Running a File System Report ................................................................................................................58

Using the Search Function .................................................................................................... 59

Working with Search Results ..................................................................................................................61

Adding, Editing, and Deleting Source Property Columns ......................................................... 61

Finding and Replacing Property Values ................................................................................. 65

Editing Source Column Properties ........................................................................................ 66

Merging and Duplicating Source Columns .............................................................................. 67

Using Excel Files for Source Content Editing ......................................................................... 69

Exporting File Share Content to Excel ....................................................................................................69

Importing File Share Content from Excel ................................................................................................73

Using CSV Files for Content Editing ...................................................................................... 76

Exporting Source Content to a CSV File .................................................................................................76

Importing CSV Files ................................................................................................................................79

Comparing Source and Target Content ................................................................................. 81

Extracting Source Content from Property Columns ................................................................. 82

Extracting MS Office File Properties for Items Within a File Share Connection ......................... 85

Adding SharePoint Lookup and Choice Columns to File Share Connections .............................. 86

Setting Lookup or Choice Column Values ..............................................................................................88

Mapping and Migrating Lookup and Choice Values ...............................................................................89

Linking Source Columns to SharePoint Managed Metadata .................................................... 89

Creating Taxonomy Columns .................................................................................................................90

Setting Taxonomy Values for File Share Columns .................................................................................92

Mapping and Migrating Taxonomy Values ..............................................................................................93

Linking Source Columns to SharePoint External Data (BCS) Columns ...................................... 93

Creating External Data (BCS) Columns ..................................................................................................94

Setting External Data (BCS) Column Values ..........................................................................................95

Page 5: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

Content Matrix 5

Mapping External Data (BCS) Values .....................................................................................................96

Viewing and Editing Long String Column Type Values ............................................................ 96

Creating a SharePoint Object ............................................................................................... 97

Creating a SharePoint Site .....................................................................................................................97

Create SharePoint Site Collection ..........................................................................................................98

Create a SharePoint List ......................................................................................................................100

Create SharePoint Folder .....................................................................................................................101

Deleting a SharePoint Object ............................................................................................. 102

Viewing StoragePoint Details ............................................................................................. 103

Initiating a Migration .............................................................................................................. 105

Migrating a File Share Folder as a SharePoint Site .............................................................. 105

Migrating a File Share Folder as a SharePoint Document Library .......................................... 106

Migrating File Share Files as SharePoint Documents ............................................................ 106

Copying a SharePoint Site or Documents into a File Share ................................................... 107

Configuring Copying Options ................................................................................................ 108

Folder Options .................................................................................................................. 108

File Options ...................................................................................................................... 111

Mapping Field Types ......................................................................................................... 114

Permissions Options .......................................................................................................... 116

Mapping Users .....................................................................................................................................118

Mapping Permissions ...........................................................................................................................120

Target Hierarchy Options ................................................................................................... 122

Filter Options .................................................................................................................... 126

Link Correction Option ....................................................................................................... 127

Logging Options ................................................................................................................ 128

StoragePoint Options ........................................................................................................ 129

Transformations Options .................................................................................................... 130

Using PowerShell to Create Custom Transformations .........................................................................131

Saving or Running a Migration Action .................................................................................... 133

Saving a Job Configuration as a Template ........................................................................... 133

Applying a Job Template ......................................................................................................................134

Managing Job Templates .....................................................................................................................135

Exporting a Job Template .....................................................................................................................136

Importing a Job Template .....................................................................................................................137

Page 6: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

Content Matrix 6

Importing and Exporting Migration Jobs ............................................................................... 138

Scheduling a Migration Job ................................................................................................ 138

How the Schedule Task Feature Works ...............................................................................................139

Before Configuring Migration Actions to Run as Scheduled Tasks ......................................................139

Initiating a Scheduled Task ..................................................................................................................140

Scheduling a Migration Job via the Content Matrix UI ................................................................142

Scheduling a Migration Job via the Windows Task Scheduler ...................................................148

Submitting a Distributed Migration Job ................................................................................ 148

Distributed Migration Job Limitations ....................................................................................................149

Before Submitting a Distributed Migration Job .....................................................................................149

Procedure for Submitting a Distributed Migration Job ..........................................................................150

Managing the Distributed Migration Job Queue ...................................................................................151

Deleting a Distributed Migration Job .....................................................................................................152

Refreshing the Jobs List .................................................................................................... 152

Log Files ................................................................................................................................ 153

Log Item Details ................................................................................................................ 154

Exporting Jobs to an Excel File ........................................................................................... 156

Procedure for exporting one or more jobs to an Excel file ....................................................................156

Information in Exported Excel Files ......................................................................................................157

Copying Job Logging to Other Applications ......................................................................... 160

Creating a Support Zip File ................................................................................................ 161

Using PowerShell with Content Matrix ................................................................................... 163

Configuring PowerShell for Use with Content Matrix ............................................................. 164

Registering the Metalogix Command DLL Files ....................................................................................164

Adding the PowerShell Snap-Ins for the Metalogix Application Framework ..........................................166

Content Matrix PowerShell Commandlet List ....................................................................... 169

Metalogix.Jobs.Reporting.Commands ..................................................................................................169

Export-JobHistory .......................................................................................................................169

Metalogix.SharePoint.Commands .........................................................................................................170

Add-MLSharePointSiteCollection ...............................................................................................170

Add-Permissions .........................................................................................................................172

Add-SharePointFolder ................................................................................................................173

Add-SharePointList .....................................................................................................................174

Add-SharePointSite ....................................................................................................................175

Clear-GlobalMappings ................................................................................................................177

Compare-MLSharePointFolder ...................................................................................................177

Compare-MLSharePointList .......................................................................................................178

Compare-MLSharePointSite .......................................................................................................178

Get-MLSharePointDatabase ......................................................................................................179

Get-MLSharePointFolder ............................................................................................................179

Page 7: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

Content Matrix 7

Get-MLSharePointFolderFromDatabase ....................................................................................179

Get-MLSharePointItembyFileName ............................................................................................179

Get-MLSharePointItembyID ........................................................................................................180

Get-MLSharePointItemFromDatabase ........................................................................................180

Get-MLSharePointList ................................................................................................................180

Get-MLSharePointListFromDatabase .........................................................................................181

Get-MLSharePointServer ...........................................................................................................181

Get-MLSharePointSite ................................................................................................................181

Get-MLSharePointTenant ..........................................................................................................181

Get-SharePointSiteFromDatabase .............................................................................................182

Refresh-SharePointNode ...........................................................................................................182

Remove-MLSharePointFolder ....................................................................................................183

Remove-MLSharePointItem ........................................................................................................184

Remove-MLSharePointList .........................................................................................................185

Remove-MLSharePointSite ........................................................................................................186

Remove-MLSharePointSiteCollection ........................................................................................187

Search-SharePointSite ...............................................................................................................188

Update-SharePointSiteCollectionSettings ..................................................................................190

Metalogix.System.Commands ...............................................................................................................191

Set-ApplicationDataPath .............................................................................................................191

Set-CommonDataPath ................................................................................................................191

Get-MetalogixConfigurationVariable ...........................................................................................191

New-Filter ...................................................................................................................................192

Join-Filter ....................................................................................................................................192

Invoke-Filter ................................................................................................................................192

Load-MetalogixConfigurationVariableSettings ............................................................................192

New-MetalogixSerializableObject ...............................................................................................193

New-MetalogixSerializableObjectCollection ...............................................................................193

Set-MetalogixConfigurationVariable ...........................................................................................193

Set-MetalogixDefaultResolverSetting .........................................................................................193

Metalogix.File.Commands .....................................................................................................................194

Copy-File ....................................................................................................................................194

Copy-FileAsHierarchy .................................................................................................................195

Copy-FileAsSiteHierarchy ...........................................................................................................197

Copy-FileToSite ..........................................................................................................................197

Copy-FolderAsFolder ..................................................................................................................197

Copy-FolderAsHierarchy ............................................................................................................199

Copy-FolderAsList ......................................................................................................................199

Copy-FolderAsSite ......................................................................................................................199

Copy-FolderAsSiteHierarchy ......................................................................................................199

Get-File .......................................................................................................................................199

Get-Files .....................................................................................................................................200

Get-Folder ..................................................................................................................................200

Get-Folders .................................................................................................................................200

Refresh-File ................................................................................................................................200

Refresh-Folder ............................................................................................................................201

Page 8: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

Content Matrix 8

Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings ........................................................... 202

Configuring Content Matrix for Distributed Migration ............................................................. 202

Distributed Migration Components .......................................................................................................203

Distributed Migration System Requirements ...............................................................................204

Using the Wizard to Set Up Distributed Migration ................................................................................205

Setting Up Distributed Migration Manually ...........................................................................................215

Installing an X.509 Security Certificate for Remote Agents .........................................................215

Agent Databases for Distributed Migration .................................................................................219

Managing Agents ........................................................................................................................222

Configuring Proxy Settings ................................................................................................. 229

Manually Configuring Proxy Settings ....................................................................................................230

Restricting Available Actions and Suppressing Events .......................................................... 232

ServerAdapterConfig.xml File Format ...................................................................................................232

Actions That Can Be Disabled on the Server Side ...............................................................................233

Client Side Configuration .................................................................................................... 236

Changing the Managed Metadata Migration Batch Size ......................................................................236

Configuring Metabase Settings ............................................................................................................237

Changing Resource Utilization Settings ................................................................................ 239

Configuration Variable Files ................................................................................................ 240

Frequently Asked Questions .................................................................................................. 243

Created Dates Not Retained .............................................................................................. 243

CSV Key Column ............................................................................................................... 243

CSV Usage ....................................................................................................................... 244

Evaluation Key Limitations .................................................................................................. 244

General Limitation Questions .............................................................................................. 245

Install MSI Error 2869 ....................................................................................................... 246

License Key Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 246

Changing a Job Configuration for Multiple Files .................................................................... 247

Multiple Clients .................................................................................................................. 248

Can I Use Multiple Filters in a Crawl? .................................................................................. 248

SharePoint Metadata Delimiter ........................................................................................... 249

Source Files ...................................................................................................................... 250

Using Proxies, Load Balancing or Alternate Access Mappings ............................................... 250

Content Matrix Console Generated XML Files ..................................................................... 251

Page 9: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

Content Matrix 9

SharePoint 2013 and 2016 Site Collection Creation Issue ..................................................... 252

Job List Database fails to Load After Upgrade .................................................................... 254

Migrating Empty Folders .................................................................................................... 255

Retrying Failed Document Copies to O365 CSOM Connections ............................................ 255

Azure Batches Getting Stuck .............................................................................................. 256

Migration Error Message 'There was an Error Reading from the Pipe: The Pipe has beenEnded (109, 0xd6)' ............................................................................................................ 257

Error Making a Browser-Based Connection with PowerShell Console Open ........................... 258

About Us ................................................................................................................................ 260

Contacting Quest .............................................................................................................. 260

Technical Support Resources ............................................................................................. 261

Page 10: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

10Introduction

Content Matrix

· SharePoint 2016 - Document off-loading only

· Microsoft Office 365 Standard and Office 365 Dedicated - document off-loading only

Supported Target Systems The following target systems are supported in Metalogix Content Matrix Console:

· Windows SharePoint Services (WSS) 3.0

· Microsoft Office SharePoint Server (MOSS) 2007

· SharePoint 2010 (Foundation and Server)

· SharePoint 2013 (Foundation and Server)

· SharePoint 2016

· Microsoft Office 365 Standard and Office 365 Dedicated

· Windows File Shares (Local or Networked drives) - Document off-loading only

· Mapped network drives - Document off-loading only

Key FeaturesThere are many advantages to using Metalogix Content Matrix Console, including the following:

Ease of useSimilar to the Windows File Explorer, Metalogix Content Matrix Console has a familiar, tree-based

copy-and-paste style user interface.

Valuable data retentionAll version chains, metadata, user-edit information, and most views can be preserved.

Multiple site connectionsConnect to multiple SharePoint sites, across any number of servers, for easy consolidation or

distribution of your SharePoint data.

Working remotelyDo all the heavy lifting for your SharePoint migration from the convenience of your own machine.

Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your

browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

Batch workMultiple list migration operations can be batched up for convenience, and re-run at any time. Run

your migrations at night and view the results/logs in the morning.

Page 11: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

11Introduction

Content Matrix

ComplianceAll migration activity is done through the supported SharePoint APIs. There are no unsupported,

direct writes to the SharePoint database.

PowerShell functionalityPowerShell functionality is incorporated into the Metalogix Content Matrix User Interface (UI), and

any action in the UI can also be performed with PowerShell. Cmdlets are also included, so scripts

can be manually created and run.

Product Announcements Splash Screen

When you launch the Metalogix Content Matrix Console, a splash screen displays with the latest

Metalogix Content Matrix product announcements. If you have internet access, you will receive

announcements directly from the Quest website. If you do not have internet access, the splash

screen displays offline text included with your Metalogix Content Matrix installation.

You have the option of preventing this screen from displaying in the future by clicking the Do not

show this screen again box. (If you select this option, display of the splash screen will resume the

next time you perform a Metalogix Content Matrix Console installation or upgrade.)

Automatic Upgrades

Metalogix Content Matrix Console can automatically check online to see if a more recent version of

the product is available for download. This takes place when Metalogix Content Matrix starts. To

help ensure that you are taking advantage of the latest features and fixes, it provides a direct line

to download and installation of new Metalogix Content Matrix builds.

Automatic Upgrades requires access to the internet. While Metalogix Content Matrix will check

every time it is opened, it is also possible to run a manual check. To do so, go to the main toolbar

and choose Help > Check for Updates.

If you are already running the latest build, the Check for Updates dialog will open and you will be

informed that you already have the latest version installed. If there is a new build available for

download, the Download and Install Update dialog will open.

Running the Automatic UpdateWhen Metalogix Content Matrix checks for updates and finds a newer build available for

download, users will be prompted to update with the Download and Install Update dialog.

Page 12: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

12Introduction

Content Matrix

1. Click [Download] to directly download the latest build to your current machine.

The progress of the download is displayed in the Download progress bar.

NOTE: If you are accessing the internet through a proxy server, the here link can be clicked on

to open the proxy configuration dialog.

2. Once the download is complete, click [OK] to continue.

The Download and Install Update dialog will still be open, but the Download button will be

replaced with the [Install] button.

You will have the option of installing the new build directly from here by clicking the [Install]

button. This will open the Installation guide. If you are continuing the installation process directly

from this dialog, then the Metalogix Content Matrix Console will close itself down, so the install

process can be run.

NOTE: When running the automatic upgrade process, only the latest build of the Metalogix

Content Matrix Console will be updated. Any installations of the Extensions Web Service will have

to be updated manually. See the Metalogix Content Matrix Advanced Install Guide for details.

Page 13: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

13Entering the License Key

Content Matrix

Entering the License Key

2

When installing the Metalogix Content Matrix Console for the first time or when launching the

Console after your license has expired, you will be prompted to input an Activation License Key. If

you are trying to install a new license key over an existing key, choose Help > Update License from

the Metalogix Content Matrix Console ribbon. You will also be prompted to enter a license key

when installing Organizer or License Check.

To enter a license key:

1. In the Activate License Key dialog, select I have a license key, and enter the license key provided

by Quest (the key can be copied and pasted into the provided space).

NOTE: If you are updating from a Metalogix Content Matrix installation older than version 6,

select the I am updating from an older version and have an old-style key option, and enter the

key in the provided space (or paste into the first field from your clipboard).

2. Select the appropriate activation method.

NOTE: Most systems can use the Online activation method as long as the system has internet

access. If you are unable to use the online activation method due to security settings or lack of

internet access, the Offline activation option can be used.

Page 14: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

14Entering the License Key

Content Matrix

Online Activation

1. After entering the license key, select Online activation.

2. If you need to configure proxy settings:

§ Click the Set proxy… link.

§ Follow the procedure for Configuring Proxy Settings.

3. Click [Next].

Metalogix Content Matrix will contact the licensing server and attempt to authenticate the

license key, after which, on successful activation, a 'Congratulations!' message will be returned,

and the license key will be active and in use.

4. Click [Finish] to complete the process.

Offline ActivationNOTE: The offline activation option is generally used in cases where you cannot use the online

activation due to security settings or lack of internet access. This option will still require some

internet access, but allows for the authentication to be done from another machine that is not as

restricted by security or has a connection to the internet.

1. Select Offline activation.

2. Click [Next].

A Generate Activation Request dialog displays with a different key. This key can be copied from

the window, or the Save to file option can be used to save the key into a text file (in case it

needs to be copied to another machine).

3. Copy the Activation URL (listed under the Activation Request) to a web browser that has

internet access.

Alternately if the system the Metalogix Content Matrix Console is on does have internet access

through a Web browser, click Go to automatically open a web browser to this URL.

4. On a machine that has internet access, use the Activation URL to navigate to the Offline

Activation page.

5. Either:

§ Enter the key into the Activation data text box.

OR

§ If the key was saved to a file, select Browse and navigate to the file.

6. Click [Activate].

Upon successful activation, a new key displays in the text box.

7. Do one of the following:

§ To save the key as a DAT file, click [Download file].

Page 15: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

15Entering the License Key

Content Matrix

OR

§ To copy the key to the clipboard (if the license will be activated on the same machine), click

[Copy text].

8. Click [OK] to continue.

9. Return to the Activate License dialog.

10. If the Generate Activation Request window is still active, click [Next]. to the Enter your

Activation Response window.

11. Use one of the following options:

§ If you copied the key to the clipboard on the same machine, paste it into the window.

§ If you saved the key to a DAT file, navigate to, and select the DAT file.

12. Click [Next]. The license key will be active and in use.

13. Click [Finish] to complete the process.

Checking the Current Content Matrix ConsoleLicense

To check the status of the license key in use, open the About dialog. Here, information such as the

license type, expiry date (if any), number of servers used, number of seats, size limitations for

migrations, and how much data has already been migrated can be seen.

NOTE: If an offline license is used, the offline activation process will need to be used to do this

update instead, unless the system that the Metalogix Content Matrix Console is installed on has

internet access.

To check the current license:

1. In the Content Matrix Console ribbon menu, choose Help > About.

2. In the dialog that opens, click [Refresh]. This will force a refresh of this data from the licensing

servers and update the information.

Page 16: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

16Overview of Content Migration

Content Matrix

Overview of Content Migration

3

Content Migration is a subset of a broader data gathering process known as "Extract, Transform

and Load" (ETL):

· Extract - Extraction is the acquisition of data from source systems (e.g., a file share or a web

site).

· Transform - Transformation is the modification of source data to conform to the requirements

of the target system (e.g., changing field names and manipulating data values).

· Load - Load is the movement of the data into the target system.

In the context of Metalogix Content Matrix, content migration describes the ETL process as it

applies specifically to the migration of documents to enterprise content management systems. The

content migration process performed by Metalogix Content Matrix is broken down into the

following steps:

· Import - The first step in any content migration effort is to load the source content into

Metalogix Content Matrix. This is generally achieved by connecting to a source file system that

contains content items that are candidates for migration.

Metalogix Content Matrix imports references to content items and maintains a copy of all desiredmetadata within a project. Please see the topic entitled "Importing Content" for more details onworking with an item's metadata.

· Analyze Content - After importing a large set of content into a project, Metalogix Content Matrix

provides powerful analysis tools to better understand the source content. Through analysis, a

user can determine exactly which content to migrate, where it should be migrated and when the

migration should occur.

· Edit Content - Most source metadata content requires modification or additional attribution

prior to being migrated. Metalogix Content Matrix Console provides a flexible and extensible

metadata management framework for updating and creating metadata. In conjunction with

content analysis tools, Metalogix Content Matrix Console empowers users to fine-tune metadata

before migrating to an enterprise content management system such as SharePoint.

· Migrate - Content that has been imported and edited, is then ready to be exported. Metalogix

Content Matrix Console - File Share Edition includes numerous configurable export actions to get

content from source to destination with all applicable metadata.

Using these four steps, Metalogix Content Matrix can be used to easily perform migrations of any

size.

Page 17: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

17Overview of Content Migration

Content Matrix

Introductory Concepts

The basic introductory concepts for working with this edition of Metalogix Content Matrix include:

· Content Items

· Metadata

· Actions

Content Items

A content item in Metalogix Content Matrix is a reference to a document or other file that is a

candidate for migration. With every content item, Metalogix Content Matrix provides a set of data

loaded from the source file system, such as file name, size, and created and modified dates, as well

as additional metadata set by Metalogix Content Matrix for that item. Metalogix Content Matrix

provides a powerful set of editing and analysis tools for content items which can be accessed from

the Items View.

Metadata

The metadata for a given item list is a collection of properties, such as "File Name", "MIME Type",

and "Title", describing each item in the list. These properties may be both system-defined (cannot

be removed by the user), and user-defined. Adding or editing user-defined properties may be

achieved using the toolbar buttons on the Items View of the Project Explorer. All of these system-

Page 18: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

18Overview of Content Migration

Content Matrix

defined file properties can be found listed in the Item Property Sheet, located on the left-hand side

of the Items View. The complete set of system-defined properties is described below:

File Description Properties

The file description properties are the commonly used properties describing the file.

Property Description

Category A user-editable property that can be used for grouping content items.

"Category" is not updated automatically by any of the Metalogix Content Matrix

importers.

File Name The name of the file referenced by the content item. The File Name value isinitially derived from the Source URL property, but may be edited independently.

File Size The size, in bytes, of the file referenced by the content item. "File Size" is

automatically updated by both the File System Content Importer, and the Web

Content Importer.

Filename

Extension

This property is read only, and is calculated by taking all the text after and

including the last dot (".") from the File Name property. For example, if the File

Name is "foobar.html", the Filename Extension is ".html."

MIME Type The content type of the file referenced by the content item. For example,

text/html, application/msword, application/pdf, etc. "MIME Type" is

automatically updated by both the File System Content Importer, and Web

Content Importer.

Source Path The path portion of the Source URL property. For example, if the Source URL is "\

\COMPUTER\Users\admin\Documents\file.txt" then the Source Path would be

"\Users\admin\Documents\file.txt".

Status Displays the status from the last action performed. For example, after importing

a content item using the CSV content importer, the value will be set to "Imported

from CSV".

Template "Template" is updated by the File System Content Importer, when the "Import

Document Metadata" option is checked. For example, in the case of a Microsoft

Word document, the value might be set to "Normal.dot". This property may also

be user-edited for grouping files, or web pages by layout style.

Page 19: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

19Overview of Content Migration

Content Matrix

Title The title of the file referenced by the content item. In the case of a Microsoft

Office document, this property shows the value of the Title field configured from

within the MS Office "File > Properties" dialog.

File Location Properties

The File Location Properties describe where the actual file(s) referenced by the content item lives.

The Content View can be configured to display the content referenced by any of the Location

Properties.

Property Description

Exported URL The URL pointing to content that has been migrated. For example, when

migrating documents to SharePoint, this property will contain the URL of the

document within SharePoint.

Source URL Contains the full path to the file.

File Origin Properties

The File Origin Properties describe who, when, and how the file was authored. These properties

are automatically updated by the File System Content Importer. Some of the properties below are

dynamically added by the File System Content Importer.

Property Description

Application

Name

When present, this property describes the application used to author the file.

For example, property might contain the value "Microsoft Office Word", or

"Microsoft Office Excel."

Author This property is the current Owner of the file. It is taken from the Owner field of

the Microsoft Office "File > Properties" dialog. In some cases, this field my not be

available directly under the details tab but can be viewed by going to the Security

tab and clicking the Advanced button.

Company This property is taken from the Company field of the Microsoft Office Properties

dialog.

Page 20: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

20Overview of Content Migration

Content Matrix

Date Created The date the file was created. This property is taken from the file system by the

File System Content importer.

Date Last

Saved

The date the file was last saved. This property is taken from the file system by

the File System Content importer.

Last Saved By The name of the last person to edit the file. This property is taken from the file

system by the File System Content importer.

Revision

Number

When present, this property reflects the revision number of the document. This

property is taken from the statistics tab of the Microsoft Office Properties"

dialog.

Item Properties

The item properties are read-only, system managed properties.

Property Description

Item # The item number which can be used for identifying the item.

Note: This value is not guaranteed to be unique. A hidden,

system-managed GUID is the actual unique identifier of the

item.

ItemDateCreated The time and date the item was created within Metalogix

Content Matrix.

ItemDateModified The time and date the item was modified within Metalogix

Content Matrix.

Migration Related Properties

These properties are used during content migration.

Property Description

Last Migrated

On

The time the item was last migrated.

Page 21: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

21Overview of Content Migration

Content Matrix

Last Migrated

To

The URL where the item was last migrated to. This property is the same as

"Exported URL."

Migration

Settings

The settings that describe how the content item should be migrated (target

location, options, etc.). Clicking on the cell for this property will show a ellipsis

("...") button. Clicking on this button will bring up an editor for configuring these

settings.

Migration

Status

The current migration status of the item.

Target System The type of system this item will be migrated to.

Actions

Generally, an action is a set of steps performed on a content item. There are three types of actions

in Metalogix Content Matrix, and multiple actions of each type.

· Import Actions - An import action imports content items from a File Share source. Import

actions create and update content items under a specific File Share connection node. For

example, web crawling is a type of import action.

· Item Actions - An item action acts on an existing content item. For example, search and

replace, create report, and load metadata are all item actions.

· Copy/Paste Actions - Copy and Paste actions migrate existing content items to a destination

repository. For example, documents can be copied from their source location and pasted to a

SharePoint Library.

Page 22: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

22Content Matrix Console End User Interface

Content Matrix

Content Matrix Console End UserInterface

4

The Metalogix Content Matrix Console User Interface (UI) is simple and easy to use. There are

three high level components to the configurable interface:

· Explorer View 1 - At minimum, the interface will always display one Explorer Control, providing

multiple ways to view the content for any active connections to source and target

environments.

· Explorer View 2 - A second explorer control can be displayed simultaneously. Having two

explorers visible allows the user to simultaneously view two different parts of the connected

content set. For example, in many cases it makes sense to show a migration source on the left

in Explorer Control 1, and a SharePoint migration target on the right in Explorer Control 2.

· Job List - Beneath the Explorer Control windows is a Job list that shows the history of migration

jobs and other tasks that have been executed or batched in Content Matrix.

More information on these UI components is provided in the topics that follow.

Page 23: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

23Content Matrix Console End User Interface

Content Matrix

Main (Ribbon) Toolbar

At the top of the Metalogix Content Matrix Console is a ribbon menu allowing access to the

following five menu group settings:

· Connection

· View

· Settings

· Help

The Metalogix Content Matrix Console menu ribbon can be expanded or minimized to fit the user's

needs. When expanded, a set of options will be available depending on the selected menu

heading.

When minimized, options will only be visible when a menu heading is selected. Otherwise, only

menu headings will show. The minimize and expand options can also be accessed by right-clicking

an option in the ribbon itself. This opens a context (right-click) menu where the Minimize the

Ribbon option can be selected or deselected.

Quick Access Toolbar

The Quick Access Toolbar can be accessed above the ribbon. The Quick Access Toolbar can also be

moved just below the ribbon by selecting the drop down menu (on the top left-hand side) and

choosing Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon, or it can be placed back above the ribbon

by choosing Show Quick Access Toolbar Above the Ribbon. Any option that is available under one

of the menu group headings can have a shortcut for the option placed into the Quick Access

Toolbar. This can be done by right-clicking on the option in the ribbon, and choosing Add to Quick

Access Toolbar.

Page 24: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

24Content Matrix Console End User Interface

Content Matrix

Shortcuts can also be removed from the Quick Access Toolbar either by selecting the option within

the ribbon and opening the context (right-click) menu, or by selecting the shortcut option itself,

opening the context (right-click) menu, and choosing Remove from Quick Access Toolbar.

Explorer Control View Tabs

The Metalogix Content Matrix Console user interface uses an Explorer Control style window which

allows you to navigate, view, and select the desired content for migration. The Explorer Control

window is broken up into three separate tab options, each of which contains its own set of options

for viewing content and data. They are:

· Explorer View Tab

· Items View Tab

· Browser View Tab

Explorer View Tab

The Explorer view tab allows you to navigate through your various connections in a tree view. You

can navigate to and selected a desired SharePoint site collect, site, list/document library or sub-

folder or a under a specific connection or a specific file share source connection.

There are a set of filtering options that are available in this tab, as well as a set of ordering options.This allows you to display, sort, and filter all of your connections as desired.

Page 25: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

25Content Matrix Console End User Interface

Content Matrix

There are three primary Filtering options: Text Filter, Connections Filter, and Status Filter.

· Text Filter: For example, if you only want to view connections that contain "2010" in the URL,

you can enter "2010" in the Filter text box, and click the Filter button to the right of the text

value. The filter will then be applied to all connections in that Explorer View tab, and only

connections that contain a "2010" value will be displayed.

NOTE: To remove a text box filter, delete the filter value from the text box and re-run the filter

action.

· Connections Filter - This option consists of a drop down menu that allows you to filter by

connection type. By default, all of these options are selected, but one or more can be DE-

selected.

· Status Filter - This option consists of a drop-down list with the various connection status

options.

§ NotChecked – Metalogix Content Matrix has not tried to validate the connection yet.

Page 26: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

26Content Matrix Console End User Interface

Content Matrix

§ Checking - Metalogix Content Matrix is currently trying to validate the connection.

§ Valid - Metalogix Content Matrix has tried to validate the connection, and has been

successful. A connection has been established.

§ Invalid - Metalogix Content Matrix has tried to validate the connection, and has been

unsuccessful. A connection has not been established.

§ Warning - Metalogix Content Matrix has tried to validate the connection, and has been

successful. A connection has been established, however, a warning message has been

given.

By default all of the status types are selected but, as with the Connections Filter, one or more can

be de-selected.

You can also Sort by

· Default - All of the connections in the order they were added.

· Type -These are the same types that are listed in the Connections Filter drop down menu.

When selected, connection types will be sorted in the following order:

§ FileShare Connections

§ SharePoint farms (this includes all Web App and Farm connection to a server, as well as

Database connections)

§ SharePoint Site connections, which include Site connection types, and Read-only

connections to SharePoint

You can combine various filter and sort options.

Items View Tab

The Items View tab displays any items/documents that exist directly under the selected node (that

is, the content of any subfolders under the selected node-will not be displayed), along with column

metadata.

Page 27: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

27Content Matrix Console End User Interface

Content Matrix

There are four main options that are available through this tab. These options are:

· Search – To perform a full or partial text search, enter the string in the search box then either

and either press <Enter>, or click the magnifying glass icon to run the search.

NOTE: The search will be run on the name column (the FileLeafRef) by default, but you can

select a different column to search from the drop-down to the right of the search box.

· Refresh - This button will refresh all of the items in the Items View tab.

· Show/Hide Version History - This button option is only available when the selected document

library/list has versioning enabled. When this button is selected the Items View tab will be

divided into two sections, a top section displaying all of the items/documents and a bottom

section displaying all of the versions for the selected item/document.

Page 28: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

28Content Matrix Console End User Interface

Content Matrix

When an item/document is selected in the top window, all of that item/document's version’s

will be listed in the bottom half of the window. You can then look at the metadata for each

item/document version that exists. This option can be combined with the Show/Hide

Properties button.

If the Show Version History button has already been selected, this will change to be a Hide

Version History button instead. You can use this option to stop looking at item/document

version histories.

· Show/Hide Properties - The Show Properties button allows you to see a list-style view of the

available fields (columns) and their values, for a selected item/document. Any value listed in

dark text can be edited and within the window.

The fields in the Properties window can also be ordered by category, or alphabetically. By default,

the fields are ordered by category, and are listed alphabetically within each category. If listed

alphabetically, then all property fields (columns) will be listed in alphabetical order, with no

breakdown by category. There are two buttons at the top of the Properties window that can be

used to determine what ordering type is used. This option can be combined with the Show/Hide

Version History button.

If the Show Properties button has already been selected, this will change to be a Hide Properties

button instead. Use this option to close the Properties window.

Browser View Tab

The Browser View displays a view of the content as it would be seen in a web browser for a

selected SharePointnode. It is also available if selecting a single item in the Items View. When

selected, this tab will display a fully functioning web browser view of the selected content. You can

use this Browser View to navigate or work with their content, the same way they would through a

normal web browser window.

Page 29: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

29Content Matrix Console End User Interface

Content Matrix

Jobs List

Jobs in Metalogix Content Matrix Console can be managed from the Job List. Jobs, are listed for

migration actions that have already been run, as well as for actions that have been saved.

Using the Connection Search Function

This search feature allows you to do a search through a File Share connection orthe top-level node

of a SharePoint connection for sites, lists, folders, and files. Filters can also be applied to the

search criteria using the four main metadata fields (Created, Created By, Modified, Modified By) as

well as content types. The search results can be sorted through, and you can view each returned

item's properties. You can also run actions on returned items using the right-click menu.

NOTE: In addition to the Search feature, the Find feature can be used on File Share sources from

the Items View tab.

Page 30: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

30Content Matrix Console End User Interface

Content Matrix

To run a Search:

1. In Explorer View, select the connection in which you want to search.

2. Right-click and choose Search.

3. Enter a Search Term/Filter and/or click [Advanced Options] and select any additional criteria

you want to use.

4. Click [Search].

All the results of the search display in the bottom pane. Select a result from the list to:

· View the metadata field properties for a selected item (by clicking [Show Properties]).

· Perform an action on a selected item (by right-clicking it and choosing the action).

Page 31: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

31Content Matrix Console End User Interface

Content Matrix

Using Multi-Select

Multi-select can be used to select a number of nodes on the source side Explorer View tree, and

migrate those nodes to a target SharePoint instance. Multiple SharePoint connections can be

selected at one time, but only to Disconnect or Refresh those connections. If connected to a

SharePoint farm or web application, only a single site collection can be selected at a time, however,

multi-select can be used on any sub-sites under a single site collection.

This feature also works for migrating a single list or site into multiple target locations at the same

time; for example, if you have a document library that you want to migrate into two or more target

SharePoint sites. After the library is copied, any number of desired target sites can be selected, as

long as they are all under the same target connection node, and when pasted the list will be

migrated to all of the selected target site nodes. The basic cases for multi-select are copying:

multiple to one, one to multiple, and multiple to multiple.

For example, if connected to a File Share in the Explorer View, and the navigation tree is expanded,

you can select a number of folders (Folder A, Folder B, etc.) and these can all be migrated at the

same time. After pasting the content all the selected content (Folder A, Folder B, etc.) will be

migrated under the target SharePoint node.

In addition to using check boxes to multi-select, you can use <Shift> and the <Ctrl> keys in the

conventional way.

Limitations of Multi-Select

There are a few limitations when using multi-select. These limitations are:

· Only one node type can be selected at a time - This means that if a SharePoint site node is

selected, then only other site nodes can be selected, and included in the action. If a File Share

connection type is made, only nodes under each specific connection can be selected at one

time

While the content under those nodes will be migrated (as per the selected options), only other

site nodes themselves can be selected. This is the same for SharePoint lists/libraries, and

folders. When connected to a SharePoint server only a single site collection can be selected at

one time, but multiple sites under the site collection level can be selected.

The first node selected in the multi-select will determine what type of node can be included,

and if an invalid selection is made, then the node that you tried to select will only blink. For

example, if a list is selected, then only other lists, within the site collection, can be selected. If

you try to select a SharePoint folder or site, then this is an invalid selection, and the folder or

site will blink.

· Available Context (Right-Click) Menu Options - When using multi-select the options that are

available in the context (right-click) menu can change depending on where the multi selection

is taking place.

Page 32: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

32Content Matrix Console End User Interface

Content Matrix

Page 33: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

33Enabling Advanced Mode

Content Matrix

Enabling Advanced Mode

5

Some options in Metalogix Content Matrix are considered "advanced" and are disabled by default.

Options that require Advanced Mode are identified throughout this documentation.

To enable Advanced Mode:

In Metalogix Content Matrix Console Ribbon menu, choose Settings > Enable Advanced Mode.

NOTE: When the button is highlighted, Advanced Mode is enabled, and additional options

become available for nodes/items selected in Explorer and Item View tabs. Transformations

Options become available as well.

Page 34: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

34Enabling and Disabling Optimistic Mode

Content Matrix

Enabling and Disabling OptimisticMode

6

Metalogix Content Matrix Console - File Share Edition has an Optimistic Mode designed for faster

migration of content from a File Share to SharePoint by eliminating some of the additional checks

that are normally made as part of the migration process. Optimistic Mode is an option that can

only be set on a root File Share connection node (and not on a root SharePoint connection node).

NOTE: As of version 8.5.0.4, Optimistic Mode is disabled by default.

Known Limitation: Large File Migration

Currently, Optimistic Mode does not support large file migration. For a CSOM target connection, if

a file over 250 MB is encountered during migration, a message will be logged that prompts you to

disable Optimistic Mode before attempting to migrate it.

How Versioning is Handled Based on Mode and SharePoint "RequireCheck Out" Setting

Optimistic Mode works best when the SharePoint setting Require Check Out is disabled. If both

Optimistic Mode and Require Checkout are enabled, migrated files will need to be manually

checked in after migration. The following table identifies how versioning is handled based on the

various combinations of the migration mode and the Require Check Out setting.

If Optimistic

Mode is ....

And the

SharePoint

Require Check Out

setting is ...

Then ...

enabled enabled

the files will be checked out on the target and they

will be given a version number by SharePoint after

they are manually checked in.

TIP: If you notice that all of the migrated

documents are in the checked-out status, it is likely

that the SharePoint Require Check Out setting is

enabled. This can be verified in the document

library versioning settings (Document Library

Settings > Versioning Settings). If this option is

Page 35: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

35Enabling and Disabling Optimistic Mode

Content Matrix

If Optimistic

Mode is ....

And the

SharePoint

Require Check Out

setting is ...

Then ...

enabled there are two solutions available to

migrate the File Share content and have the

documents checked-in after migration. The first

option is to disable Optimistic Mode. The second is

to disable the Require Check Out SharePoint setting

by switching it to No, then switching it back to Yes

after migration.

disabled

the files will be incremented by the smallest version

number type that is available (that is, by one minor

version or major version depending on what version

types are set).

disabled

enabled

all of the files will be migrated and automatically

checked in, and they will have the same version

number that existed in the source environment.

disabled

the documents will have a version number of 1.0

(because the documents will be viewed as "new" in

the SharePoint environment, and they will be

published as the first major version).

To enable or disable Optimistic Mode:

In Metalogix Content Matrix Console main ribbon, choose Settings > Enable Optimistic Mode,

which is:

· Highlighted when enabled

· Not highlighted when disabled

Page 36: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

36Connecting to a File System

Content Matrix

Connecting to a File System

7

In order to connect to a File Share, you will need the system path (address) to the file share, and

your login account must have access to the File Share.

To Connect to a File System Directory:

1. In the main Console ribbon, select Connection > Connect to File System.

2. In the Connect to File System dialog, either:

§ entere the connection path to the File Share

OR

§ click [Browse] and navigate to the file share.

3. Click [OK] to establish a File System connection.

Note that, by default, the Explorer view shows only the folder structure of the connected File

System.

To show files in Explorer View:

1. Select the top level connection node for the File Share connection.

Page 37: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

37Connecting to a File System

Content Matrix

2. Right-click and choose Show Files.

NOTE: To re-hide files, select the top level node, right-click and choose Hide Files.

Page 38: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

38Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

Connecting to SharePoint

8

There are five basic connection adapters that can be used to make connections to SharePoint from

Metalogix Content Matrix Console:

· A local connection to a SharePoint site or server *

· A remote connection to a SharePoint site or server

· A connection through the SharePoint Native Web Service (NWS)

· A connection through the SharePoint Client-Side Object Model (CSOM) for SharePoint 2013 or

2016, and for SharePoint Online at the site level

· An Office 365 Tenant connection (based on the CSOM connection type)

* To be compliant with Transport Layer Security (TLS) v1.2, as of version 8.6 the Metalogix

Content Matrix Console client application requires Microsoft .NET Framework 4.6 or later to run.

Since this .NET requirement is on the machine that Metalogix Content Matrix is installed on,

Metalogix Content Matrix cannot make a local Object Model (OM) connection on a SharePoint

2007 or 2010 environment, because SharePoint 2007 and 2010 require a lower version of the

.NET Framework (v.3.5), which prohibits Metalogix Content Matrix from completing the

connection. Because of this change, any migration ‘jobs’ that are configured to connect to

SharePoint 2007 and 2010 environments using a Local OM connection type will cease to work

because of the .NET Framework criteria described above, and these jobs will need to be recreated

for use over a different adapter type such as MEWS or DB.

The following table describes the connection adapter types that can be made for each supported

version of SharePoint:

SharePoint Server

Type

Local

Object

Model

(OM)

Connectio

n

(Metalogi

x Content

Matrix

Console -

installed

on server)

Remote

Object

Model

(OM)

Connectio

n

(Extension

s Web

Service

installed

on remote

server)

SharePoin

t Native

Web

Service

(NWS)

Connectio

n

SharePoin

t Client

Side

Object

Model

(CSOM)

Connectio

n

SharePoint

Office 365

Tenant

Connection

Windows SharePoint

Services (WSS) 3.0- - -

Page 39: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

39Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

SharePoint Server

Type

Local

Object

Model

(OM)

Connectio

n

(Metalogi

x Content

Matrix

Console -

installed

on server)

Remote

Object

Model

(OM)

Connectio

n

(Extension

s Web

Service

installed

on remote

server)

SharePoin

t Native

Web

Service

(NWS)

Connectio

n

SharePoin

t Client

Side

Object

Model

(CSOM)

Connectio

n

SharePoint

Office 365

Tenant

Connection

Microsoft Office

SharePoint Server

(MOSS) 2007

- - -

Microsoft SharePoint

Foundation 2010- - -

Microsoft SharePoint

2010- - -

Microsoft Office 365 -

(Only for

Office

365-D

installati

ons that

have had

the

Extensio

ns Web

Service

installed)

-

Microsoft SharePoint

2013- -

Microsoft SharePoint

2016- -

Page 40: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

40Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

Adding a connection to Office 365 is essentially the same as connecting to any other SharePoint site

or server, with a few minor differences. There are two "types" of Office 365 servers, and Metalogix

Content Matrix Console can connect to both types: Standard and Dedicated. Users can make a site

level connection to an O365 environment using the CSOM connection adapter, and they can also

make a Site Collection level connection using the Tenant connection adapter.

The Metalogix Extensions Web Service has gone through testing and has been certified by

Microsoft to be installed on Microsoft Online Services - Dedicated versions (Office 365 2010 and

2013) by request. If connecting to a Dedicated server and the Extensions Web Service has been

installed, then users can connect as a site or server using the Remote (Metalogix SharePoint

Extensions Web Service) connection.

Connecting to a SharePoint Site or Server

The same connection methods and options can be used for a normal connection to SharePoint and

a read-only connection to SharePoint. The below steps can be used for both connection types. The

read-only connection can be used to help users keep their source and target connection separate

(and it can help ensure that users do not accidentally migrate any data to a source connection).

REMINDER: If users are attempting to connect to a remote SharePoint server, then the Metalogix

SharePoint Extensions Web Service is required on the remote SharePoint server.

To connect to a SharePoint site or server:

In the Metalogix Content Matrix ribbon, choose Connection > Connect to SharePoint.

Page 41: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

41Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

To complete the Connection Options tab:

1. For Address, enter either the URL or IP address of the SharePoint site or server to which you

want to connect.

Note that the drop-down menu displays a list of previous connections.

NOTE: If you want to connect an Office 365 tenant root node, see Specifying the URL to

Connect to an O365 Tenant.

2. For Target Type, select the connection type. Use the information in the following table for

guidance.

If you want to connect… Select … Notes

directly to a SharePoint

site

Site. This option

· must be used for a site-level

connection to an Office 365

tenant

AND

· is the only connection that

is available for the NWS

connection type.

NOTE: If you want to connect

to an Office 365 tenant root

node, use the Office 365

Tenant Connection Type.

to a specific Web

application on a

SharePoint server

Web App.· This option can only be

used if using the Local or

Extensions Web Service

connection type.

· The Extensions Web Service

must be installed in order

for "Dedicated" versions of

Office 365 to use this

connection type.

to a SharePoint instance

at the Farm/server level

(which will allow you to

see all site collections

for all Web Application

on the selected server)

Farm.· This option can only be

used if using the Local or

Extensions Web Service

Connection Type.

· The Extensions Web Service

must be installed in order

for "Dedicated" versions of

Page 42: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

42Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

If you want to connect… Select … Notes

Office 365 to use this

connection type.

to the root of an O365

Tenant environment

(comparable to a farm-

level connection in an

on premises

environment)

Office 365 Tenant.· This connection type has

most of the limitations of

the CSOM connection

adapter.

NOTE: See also Additional

Requirements for O365 Tenant

Connections.

Select a Connection Type from the drop-down. Use the information in the following table for

guidance.

If … Select … Notes

you want to have

Metalogix Content

Matrix choose the

connection adapter

type that makes the

most sense for the

target SharePoint

instance

Auto Detect · If the SharePoint instance is local (installed on

the same machine as the Metalogix Content

Matrix Console), the Local Connection will be

used

· If the SharePoint instance is remote (installed

on another machine), and the Metalogix

Extensions Web Service is installed, the

Remote Connection (Extensions Web Service)

type will be used.

· If the connection is remote (installed on

another machine) and the Metalogix

SharePoint Extensions Web Service is not

installed, the Remote Connection (Native

SharePoint Web Service) type will be used.

Metalogix Content

Matrix Console is

installed locally (that

is, on the same

SharePoint server or

one of its Web Front

Ends (WFEs)

Local

Connection

(SharePoint

Object

Model)

This connection type

· is generally recommended for the target

SharePoint instance if possible, to help with

performance and to help provide the product

with greater leverage into SharePoint.

AND

Page 43: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

43Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

If … Select … Notes

· the account used for the connection. must

have the following permissions:

· Farm Administrator

· Site Collection Administrator

· DB_Owner on the Content Database (to

allow the connecting user access to the

local SharePoint Object Model (OM)).

NOTE: If StoragePoint is installed and running

on the same SharePoint instance, the connecting

account must also have access to the BlobStore,

as well as both DataReader and DataWriter

permissions to the Metalogix StoragePoint

Database.

· Metalogix Content

Matrix Console is

not installed

locally

AND

· Metalogix

SharePoint

Extension Web

Services (MEWS) is

installed on the

SharePoint

server/WFE to

which you are

connecting

Remote

Connection

(Metalogix

SharePoint

Extensions

Web

Service)

The connecting account requires Full Control over

the content being connected to and migrated.

Additional permissions are provided through the

use of the Extensions Web Service.

This connection type cannot be used for

SharePoint 2003 installations, since they do not

use SharePoint solution files.

Page 44: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

44Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

If … Select … Notes

· Metalogix Content

Matrix Console is

not installed

locally

AND

· Metalogix

SharePoint

Extension Web

Services (MEWS) is

not installed on

the SharePoint

server/WFE to

which you are

connecting

AND

· you are not

connecting to a

SharePoint 2013 or

2016 target

Remote

Connection

(Native

SharePoint

Web

Service)

This connection type:

· should be used when a Local Connection or

the Extensions Web Service connections

cannot be made; for example, when the

SharePoint deployment is hosted by a third

party provider, this connection type would be

used.

· is one of the main connection types when

connecting to SharePoint 2003 instances.

NOTE: This connection type will fail if trying to

connect to a SharePoint 2013 or 2016 target,

including Office 365 tenants.

· Metalogix Content

Matrix Console is

not installed

locally

AND

· Metalogix

SharePoint

Extension Web

Services (MEWS) is

not installed on

the SharePoint

server/WFE to

which you are

connecting

AND

· you are connecting

to a SharePoint

2013 or 2016 On

Prem or O365

target

Remote

Connection

(SharePoint

Client Side

Object

Model

2013/2016)

· This connection type should be used when a

Local Connection or the Extensions Web

Service connections cannot be made; for

example, when the SharePoint deployment is

hosted by a third party provider, this

connection type would be used.

· The connecting account requires Full Control

over the content being migrated.

When using this connection type, some Advanced

Settings cannot be preserved, including:

· Quick Edit

· Open document in browser

· Launch form in a dialog

· Allow items to be downloaded to offline

clients

While these setting cannot be preserved as part

of a migration if either the source or target is

using a CSOM connection, they can still be

manually set once the migration is complete.

Page 45: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

45Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

4. For Authentication Type, select the method to use when trying to connect to the specified

SharePoint instance. When connecting to Office 365, the two main Authentication Types will be

Office 365 Standard/ADFS Authentication and Office 365 Web Browser Authentication (Not

Auto Detected). Use the information in the following table for guidance.

If … Select …. Notes

you want Metalogix

Content Matrix to

automatically check against

the SharePoint

environment

Auto DetectMetalogix Content Matrix will check

for the next three authentication

types listed in the drop-down (in

order), and use the first method

that is found.

you want to connect to the

SharePoint environment

using the currently logged

in Windows user’s

credentials

Windows Authentication · The logged in user credentials

are used by default; however,

other credentials that use this

authentication method can also

be entered.

· This is the authentication type

that most environments use.

· you selected

Extensions Web Service

or NWS as the

Connection Type

AND

· you want to connect

using Forms Based

Authentication

Forms Based

Authentication

· Most setups for Forms Based

Authentication are supported.

· This method is limited to the

Extensions Web Service and

NWS connection types because

it authenticates through IIS and

not the Active Directory (AD).

you want to connect to

Office 365 – Standard

editions or systems with

ADFS authentication.

Office 365

Standard/ADFS

Authentication

By default the logged in user

credentials will be unavailable,

since this uses the Windows

authentication method, and the

Office 365 credentials will need to

be entered.

Currently, Metalogix Content Matrix

supports only "legacy" (not

Page 46: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

46Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

If … Select …. Notes

"modern") authentication methods

for connecting to SharePoint

Online. For more information about

legacy vs. modern authentication,

refer to the Microsoft Support

article How modern authentication

works for Office 2013 and Office

2016 client apps.

you want to connect

through a Web browser

Web Browser

Authentication (Not

Auto Detected)

This option is not searched for

within the “Auto Detect” option,

and needs to be manually set.

In order for the Metalogix Content

Matrix Console to logon to the

system users must have logged on

to the system being connected to

through the web browser on that

system first (only before the initial

connection). Since this is all done

using the Web browser for

authentication, the credentials

section of the window will be

grayed out (since it is not needed),

and it is limited to the Extensions

Web Service and NWS Connection

Types because it authenticates

through IIS and not the Active

Directory (AD).

NOTES:

· Because this connection method

uses cookies from the browser,

it may require multiple logins

when running a single

migration. However, this is only

likely if the migration is running

for a long session; this is mainly

determined by the web browser

settings for authentication. In

the event that a login is

required, a dialog box appears

that lets users log in. After the

Page 47: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

47Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

If … Select …. Notes

user logs in, the migration will

continue from where it left off.

· If you are planning to run a job

using a PowerShell script, make

sure the PowerShell console is

closed before you make the

connection using this method.

Otherwise, an error will occur

when you attempt to run the

PowerShell job.

5. For Connect As, enter/select the login credentials you want to use to connect to the SharePoint

site/server. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

If you want to … Then …

use the current Windows

user's authentication

credential

Select the (default) <Domain>\<user> radio button.

use different authentication

credentials· Select the Different User radio button, and

· Enter the applicable user name and Password.

In cases where alternate credentials are entered, it is

recommended that you select the Remember my password

check box so Metalogix Content Matrix will automatically

remember that user account password. This is especially

important if you chose Web Browser Authentication, as

credentials must be stored in the Credential Manager vault

before the connection is made.

6. If you need to configure proxy settings:

a) Select the Proxy Options tab.

b) In the Proxy server dialog, check the Enable proxy box.

Page 48: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

48Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

c) Enter the Server name (or IP) and Port for the proxy.

d) Specify the credentials to be used when connecting to the target SharePoint server.

The credentials of the current user will be selected by default (the Window authentication

credentials). Alternatively, you can specify alternate SharePoint credentials by clicking the

Different user radio button, and entering an alternate username and password.

e) Click [OK].

NOTE: If this method does not seem to be working, you can manually configure Metalogix

Content Matrix to use a proxy setting. See Manually Configuring Proxy Settings.

7. If you want to Add or Remove certificates to be included when connecting to SharePoint:

a) Select the Included Certificates tab.

Please see the Connecting with Certificates for more details on connecting to SharePoint

instances that require certificates.

b) After all of the desired connection options have been set, for all options tabs, click [OK] to

establish the connection.

If you selected a connection type other than Site, the Limit Site Collections dialog displays,

giving you the option to limit the site collections to include in your connection (which by

importing an xml file with the list of urls you want to include). This is useful if the environment

you are connecting to includes a very large number of site collections. In this case, limiting

displayed site collections can improve performance.

NOTE: If you want to View Sample xml, click the link on the dialog. The xml file you import

must follow the same format as this sample.

8. Either:

Page 49: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

49Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

§ Click [Yes – Import from XML] to specify the urls of the sites you want to include in the

connection, then browse/upload the file

OR

§ Click [No – Continue with Connection] to add all sites within the selected scope to the

connection.

NOTE: If you are connecting to an O365 tenant, an additional option, Include Office 365 tenant

my site host connection, displays. The MySites appear under their own top-level connection

node (alongside the main tenant node) with the following URL format: http://[Tenant URL]-

my.sharepoint.com. It is selected by default, but if you want to exclude them from the

connection, uncheck this box.

If Metalogix Content Matrix successfully makes the connection, a new node will appear in the

Explorer View, and you can expand this node and navigate through the SharePoint objects.

NOTE: Should the log file ever show a "could not find site on remote SharePoint server"

exception message when working with CSOM connections, simply restart the CSOM service on all

machines running the Metalogix Content Matrix console and then rerun the action.

Additional Requirements for O365 TenantConnections

Metalogix Content Matrix Console can make a tenant level connection to a SharePoint O365

environment. A tenant level connection works the same as a CSOM connection to an O365

environment, with the exception that the tenant connection can also migrate Site Collections,

MySites, and Managed Metadata. While a tenant connection is similar to the CSOM connection

type, the process of creating the connection is slightly different, and also involves some

prerequisite steps to set up permissions.

Required Permissions for Connecting to an O365Tenant

In order for users to make an O365 tenant-level connection, the connecting user must have the

Global Administrator permissions in the O365 tenant environment, as well as Site Collection

Administrator permissions for each site collection being migrated.

Refer to the Office Support article Assigning admin roles in Office 365 for details.

If the connecting user does not have sufficient permissions, the connection will not be completed

and the following connection error will display:

Page 50: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

50Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

Currently, Metalogix Content Matrix supports only "legacy" (not "modern") authentication

methods for connecting to SharePoint Online. For more information about legacy vs. modern

authentication, refer to the Microsoft Support article How modern authentication works for Office

2013 and Office 2016 client apps.

Specifying the URL to Connect to an O365 Tenant

When making an O365 Tenant connection using Metalogix Content Matrix, the SharePoint

Administration URL must be used in order for the connection to be completed; that is:

"https://<CompanyTenantName>-admin.sharepoint.com"

If an incorrect URL, such as a specific site or Site Collection URL is used, then the connection will not

be completed and the following connection error will display:

Page 51: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

51Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

NOTE: If you want to connect to a specific site or site collection, use an Object Model (OM)

connection.

Migrating to O365 Using the Azure Pipeline

Metalogix Content Matrix currently has limited support for the SharePoint Online (SPO) Migration

Pipeline.

By default Metalogix Content Matrix will try to use the Shared Azure Containers when migrating to

an SPO Tenant, provided that the Azure Pipeline and Azure Encryption options are both enabled.

Using the Shared Azure Containers does not require any additional configuration.

However, you still have the option of manually configuring Metalogix Content Matrix to use a

specific set of Azure containers instead. For detailed information on additional system and

configuration requirements for using the pipeline, please see the Metalogix Content Matrix

Performance Optimization Guide Including PowerShell PDF document included in the installation ZIP

file.

Objects Supported by the Azure Pipeline

Supported Objects

The following is a list of objects that can be migrated using the Azure Pipeline/SPO Containers:

· Files

· Folders

· Metadata associated with files and folders

· Permission mappings

Supported Actions

The following is a list of actions that are currently supported by the Azure pipeline:

· Paste Files

· Paste Folder

· Paste Folder > As Document Library

· Paste Folder > As Site

· The following hierarchy-related actions:

Page 52: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

52Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

§ Following a Copy File action, Paste Web Hierarchy

§ Following a Copy Folder action, Paste Folder Hierarchy and Paste Hierarchy

Connecting with Certificates

When connecting to SharePoint, there are two options that can be used to add certificates to the

list of included certificates: Add Installed Certificate and Add Certificate From File.

SharePoint connections do not actually save the certificate information directly, but instead they

save the data on how to locate the certificates that are in use. This means that if the certificates are

deleted or moved from the referenced location, they will no longer be used with the SharePoint

connection and will have to be manually re-added.

SharePoint Certificates are also supported in PowerShell. When working with PowerShell it is still

recommended that the initial SharePoint connection is first configured in the Metalogix Content

Matrix Console. The recommended process when working with certificates and PowerShell is to

first add the connection (with certificates) in Metalogix Content Matrix, then set up a migration

action in the UI and generate a PowerShell script. This will allow you to get the connection format

that is required to create a connection in PowerShell, and it can then be written out manually (if

desired).

It should also be noted that the Web Browser Authentication type does not automatically detect

certificates. In order for certificates to be included with this method, they must first be installed in

the appropriate locations in order for a web browser itself to access them.

NOTE: In some cases, including certificates can potentially result in receiving "maximum request

length" messages when migrating smaller files because the certificate information is included

when the data is being migrated.

To Add Installed Certificates:

Only "Personal" certificates can be added in this manner because it is the only store that web

browsers use to find certificates when accessing a website.

1. In the SharePoint Logon dialog, select the Include Certificates tab.

Page 53: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

53Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

2. Click [Add Installed Certificate].

The Add Installed Certificates dialog displays all of the certificates that are installed in the

logged in user account's "Personal" certificate store.

3. Select any certificates that should be included, and click [OK].

When you return to the SharePoint Logon dialog the selected certificates be displayed in the

Included Certificates list, and they will be included whenever Metalogix Content Matrix is running

an action to or from the SharePoint connection.

To Add a Certificate from a file:

1. In the SharePoint Logon dialog, select the Include Certificates tab.

2. Click [Add Certificate From File].

3. Either:

§ enter a filename and location into the Certificate File text box

OR

§ select the Browse button to open a file explorer dialog and navigate to, and select, the

desired certificate.

4. If a password is required to use with the certificate, enter it in the Password (optional) text

box.

NOTE: When a connection to SharePoint is made, Metalogix Content Matrix will save the

password field for any certificates so it can re-establish a connection to that SharePoint

instance at a later date. If you are not comfortable with entering the password in the Password

(optional) field, you can move the certificate into the user account's "Personal" folder, and use

the Add Installed Certificate option instead, provided the user account/password is the same.

Page 54: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

54Connecting to SharePoint

Content Matrix

When you return to the SharePoint Logon dialog, the selected certificate will display in the

Included Certificates list, and it will be included whenever Metalogix Content Matrix is running an

action to or from the SharePoint connection.

Removing Certificates

Any certificates that have previously been added through the two Add Certificates options can also

be removed from the list of Included Certificates.

To remove a certificate:

1. In the SharePoint Logon dialog, select the Include Certificates tab.

2. Select the certificate(s) that you want to remove.

3. Click [Remove].

Page 55: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

55Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

Preparing for Your Migration

9

Metalogix Content Matrix offers a number of tools to help you locate and organize data and in

preparation for your migration. You can:

· Add a Filter to a File Share connection

· Create and manage reports on a File System connection

· Search for SharePoint and File System objects that meet criteria you specify

· Edit File Share items and their properties

· Merge and duplicate source columns

· Find and replace property values

· Export, import, and edit source columns and metadata

· Create SharePoint objects

· Delete SharePoint objects

· View StoragePoint details

Adding a Filter to a File Share Connection

You can add and edit filters on the root connection node to a file share, which will be applied to all

sub-folders and files under that connection. You may for example, only one to include files with a

certain file extensions or files that have been modified after a certain date. When a filter is added,

it will be applied to any new migration actions that are initiated from that connection. Previously

existing/configured migration actions will not have these filters applied to them.

Filters that are added and applied to a root file share connection will become default settings in

the Filter Options tab. Any changes to Filter Options will be applied to the current migration, but

will not change the filters on the root connection node.

To apply a File Share Root Node Filter:

1. Select the root connection node for a File Share source.

Page 56: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

56Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

2. Right-click and choose Add/Edit Filters to display the Filters Configuration dialog.

3. Set desired filters as you would in the Filters Options tab.

4. Click [OK] to close the dialog and use the filters on the File Share source.

NOTE: Filters will be applied to migration actions as long as Preserve Configuration Options is

enabled, as described below.

To Enable/Disable the File Share Root Node Filter:

1. In the Metalogix Content Matrix main ribbon, choose Settings > Preserve Configuration

Options, which is:

· Highlighted when enabled

· Not highlighted when disabled

NOTE: When the root node filters are disabled, you can still access the filtering options, but the

filters will not be applied to the migration.

To remove file share root node Filters:

Use the information in the following table to determine the appropriate action to take.

Page 57: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

57Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

If you want to ... Then ...

remove all filters (both standard and custom)· in Explorer View, select the node containing

the filters you want to remove, right click and

choose Remove Filters > Remove All Filters

OR

· from the Filters Configuration dialog, click

[Clear All].

remove only custom file metadata filtersin Explorer View, select the node containing the

filters you want to remove, right click and choose

Remove Filters > Remove Custom Metadata

Filters.

remove only standard metadata filtersin Explorer View, select the node containing the

filters you want to remove, right click and choose

Remove Filters > Remove Standard Metadata

Filters.

You will be prompted to confirm the action before continuing.

File System Reporting

You can use Metalogix Content Matrix to create and manage the following reports on a File System

connection:

· The Extended File System Report provides an in-depth view of content within a directory,

including:

§ Number of Files by Extension

§ Number of Files by Size

§ Number of Files by Created Year

§ Number of Files by Modified Year

§ Number of Files by Created Month for Current Year

§ Number of Files by Modified Month for Current Year

· The Simple File Systems Report provides a quick and concise view of the amount of data needing

to be migrated, including:

§ Total Number of Directories - A recursive count of all the directories below the selected

node.

Page 58: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

58Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

§ Total Number of Files - A recursive count of all files in all directories below the selected

node.

§ Number of Files by Directory - A count of all files below each directory. This count is limited

to a depth of one level.

· The Migration Report provides a condensed account of what files have been migrated to the

target SharePoint instance, the locations the content has been migrated to, and the date of the

migration. The following data is included:

§ Files Migrated by Site - An account of how many files were migrated to each SharePoint

site, and the first and last date for migrations to that site.

§ Files Migrated by Destination Library - A count of the number of files/documents that have

been migrated into each target side document library. Only document libraries that have

had content migrated into them will be listed.

§ Files Migrated by Month - A count of how many files/documents have had content

migrated into them for each month.

§ Files Migrated by Year - A count of how many files/documents have had content migrated

into them for each year.

NOTE: When configuring the options for the Migration Report, there is an additional check-

box option, Recursive. This check-box option allows for the report generation to run down

through any sub-hierarchy on the target SharePoint side.

Running a File System Report

To run a File System Report:

1. Select the FileShare content on which you want to report; either:

§ a folder node within Explorer View

OR

§ specific items within Items View.

2. Right-click and choose Reporting followed by the type of report you want to run:

§ Extended File System Report

§ Simple File System Report

§ Migration Report

3. Complete the Reports Options dialog as follows:

Page 59: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

59Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

a) Enter a Report Name.

b) If different from the default, enter or navigate to the report Output Folder.

Now you can Run the report immediately or Save the report to run at a later time from the Job List

section.

The report will be processed and when complete, the it will be available at the specified output

location. Additionally, more verbose data will be recorded in the Report Manager. The resulting

output file will be a Microsoft Office document type (i.e. docx).

Using the Search Function

This search feature allows you to do a search through a File Share connection orthe top-level node

of a SharePoint connection for sites, lists, folders, and files. Filters can also be applied to the

search criteria using the four main metadata fields (Created, Created By, Modified, Modified By) as

well as content types. The search results can be sorted through, and you can view each returned

item's properties. You can also run actions on returned items using the right-click menu.

NOTE: In addition to the Search feature, the Find feature can be used on File Share sources from

the Items View tab.

To run a Search:

1. In Explorer View, select the connection in which you want to search.

2. Right-click and choose Search.

3. Enter a Search Term/Filter and/or click [Advanced Options] and select any additional criteria

you want to use.

Page 60: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

60Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

4. Click [Search].

All the results of the search display in the bottom pane. Select a result from the list to:

· View the metadata field properties for a selected item (by clicking [Show Properties]).

· Perform an action on a selected item (by right-clicking it and choosing the action).

Page 61: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

61Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

Working with Search Results

Search results display in the bottom half of the dialog. You can sort results by any available

column.

To view an object’s Properties:

Select an object in the results list to populate the Search Properties section.

From Search results, you can perform the same actions that are available in the explorer view for

the selected object type.

To act on a search result:

Select an object in the results list, right click, and choose the appropriate option. Refer to the

applicable topic in this guide for details.

Adding, Editing, and Deleting Source PropertyColumns

You can add, edit, and delete property fields (columns) on the source connection directly from the

Metalogix Content Matrix Items view, using the Manage Columns option. Data can then be

mapped to SharePoint columns on the target

NOTE: Alternatively, you can edit columns using an exported .CSV file. See Using CSV Files for

Content Editing for details.

Any edits, additions, or deletions will be applied to the columns in general, no matter what

hierarchy level the change is made in.

Page 62: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

62Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

To access the Manage Columns dialog:

1. In Explorer View, select the folder under which you want to add the new property column.

2. Switch to Items View.

3. Click Manage Columns.

The Manage Column dialog displays a list of all of the available columns from the source node.

Information includes: the column Name, Display Name, Description, Category, Type, if it Is User

Defined, if it is Read Only, if it Is Displayed, and if it Can Display. Any rows that are highlighted are

columns that exist, but cannot be displayed.

NOTE: Any columns that are added/created by users will have a Is User Defined value of Yes, will

an Is Read Only value of No. Only columns that have been created by users can be edited.

To add a new property column:

1. In the Items View toolbar either:

· Click Manage Columns to display the Manage Columns dialog, then click the Add icon.

OR

· From the Manage Columns drop-down, select New Column.

Page 63: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

63Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

2. Enter a Property Name.

CAUTION: Once the column is created, the Property Name cannot be changed.

3. In the Type drop down, select the desired column type for the column. Available options are:

· String - For text shorter than 256 characters.

· Long String - For text longer than 256 characters.

· Integer - For integer numbers.

· Decimal - For numbers with decimals.

· Boolean - For true / false values.

· Date/Time - For date and time values.

· Url - For URL values.

· SharePoint Lookup - For SharePoint Lookup columns.

· SharePoint Choice - For SharePoint Choice columns.

· SharePoint BCS - For SharePoint BCS columns.

· SharePoint Taxonomy - For SharePoint Taxonomy columns.

NOTE: The [Configuration] button is disabled when adding or editing most column types. For

Types that require configuration (SharePoint Lookup and Choice columns, SharePoint BCS

columns and SharePoint taxonomy columns), refer to the applicable topic. Refer to the topic

on configuring SharePoint taxonomy columns for applicable detail.

4. (Optional) Enter a Description of the property.

5. Select a Category under which to place the new column (Misc. is the default value.)

6. (Optional) Enter a Display Name for the property.

NOTE: If this field is left blank, Metalogix Content Matrix will use the Property Name as the

display name.

7. Click [OK] to add the new column to the File Share connection.

Page 64: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

64Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

To edit or delete a property column:

1. In Explorer View, select the folder under which you want to add the new property column.

2. Switch to Items View.

3. Click [Manage Columns] to display the Manage Columns dialog

4. Use the information in the following table to determine the appropriate action to take.

NOTE: If an action is not valid for a selected column (for example, the column is not user-

defined or cannot be displayed) the option will be disabled.

If you want

to....

Then ...

edit a column· Select the column you want to edit.

· Click the Edit icon to display the Edit Column dialog.

· Update the editable fields (Description, Category,

and/or Display Name) as necessary.

NOTE: Property Name and Type fields cannot be edited.

show or hide

a column· Select the column you want to show or hide.

· Either:

§ Click [Hide] if the column is currently displayed.

OR

§ Click [Show] if the column is currently hidden.

delete a

column

· Select the column you want to delete

· Click the Remove icon.

CAUTION: When a column is deleted/removed, all of

the metadata for items in this field will also be removed

from the source connection in Metalogix Content

Page 65: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

65Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

If you want

to....

Then ...

Matrix. It will not, however, be removed from the actual

source data.

You will be prompted to confirm the action before

continuing.

5. Click [OK] to update the file on the source connection.

Finding and Replacing Property Values

The Find/Replace action allows you to search for specific values within a selected property field

and either return the results of the search, or replace the searched for value with a new value. The

Find/Replace action can be run on any selected node from Explorer View, or on any selected

item(s) in Items View.

This option is only available when Advanced Mode is enabled.

To Find/Replace a Property Value:

1. Select a node in Explorer View or one or more items in Items View.

2. Right-click and choose Metadata Modifications > Find and Replace in Column to display the

Search And Replace dialog.

3. In the Find what field, enter the value to search for.

4. If you want to replace the value, enter the value to Replace with.

5. In the Look in field, select the column that you want to search. The drop-down is automaticallypopulated with all of the currently available columns for which the Find/Replace can beperformed.

6. Select a the Match parameter.

Page 66: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

66Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

§ Any part of Field - Each occurrence of a the search expression is replaced.

§ Whole Field - If the whole field is equal to the value.

§ Start of Field - Only occurrences that appear at the beginning of a property are replaced.

§ End of Field - Only occurrences that appear at the end of a property are replaced.

§ Regular Expression - Each occurrence that matches the regular expression is replaced.

NOTE: When you select Regular Expression as the Match type, a Multi-line check-box

becomes enabled. This allows the search/replace value for both the searched for and

replacement value to be multiple lines of text.

§ XPath - Each node that matches the xpath query is replaced. Replacing text needs to be

valid XML.

7. If you want any replaced value to be added with the same case as the value in the Replace withfield, check the Match Case box to make the search/replace case sensitive and onlysearch/replace vales that meet the exact case of the search value.

NOTE: This is available for all Match types, except for XPath.

8. Click [OK] to run the action.

When the search/replace action starts the logs can be viewed (in progress or after the action is

finished) by clicking [Details>>]. After the action has completed a note will be displayed in the

bottom left corner of the dialog stating the number of completions, as well as any warnings or

errors that may have been encountered (if there were any).

Once complete, all of the search values will be listed in the logs, and if a value was replaced the log

will indicate that there has been a change.

Editing Source Column Properties

Within Metalogix Content Matrix you can work with and manipulate the properties (columns) of

source File Share items. This includes adding new properties and values, editing existing properties

and values, and transforming properties and values. This section will review various actions that

users can take to manipulate and work with this data.

To edit a source column:

1. In Explorer View, select the folder that contains the column be edited.

2. Select the desired folder node, then switch to Items View.

3. Click [Manage Columns] to open the Manage Columns dialog.

Any edits, additions, or changes made in this dialog will be applied to the fields (columns) in

general, no matter what hierarchy level the change is made in.

Page 67: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

67Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

4. From the list of columns, select the desired field to edit. When the field is selected, click the Edit

button on the far right-hand of the dialog. This will open the Edit Column dialog.

To Edit a source column property value:

1. In Explorer View, navigate to the folder that contains the properties you want to edit.

2. Switch to Items View.

Note that you can only edit values that are displayed with dark text, usually properties under

the Misc category heading, plus a few others. Any values that appear to be greyed out are not

available for editing (this usually consists of properties under the FileNode and File Location

Properties categories).

3. To edit a property value, either:

· Double-click the field to enable editing.

OR

· Click Show Properties in the toolbar to display a property window that provides a list of all

of the available columns and field values for the selected item. Select the field value that

you want to edit.

NOTE: You can sort data by column header.

4. Edit the field as appropriate.

5. When you are finished editing the field, press <ENTER> or select a new row.

Merging and Duplicating Source Columns

The Merge/Duplicate action allows you to copy one or more source property columns into a

another property column. The resulting column can only be of one type, so it recommended that

any property columns that are "merged" should be of the same type. For example, merging two

text columns, or two date/time column, but not merging a text column with a date/time column. If

merging multiple property fields or copying a single property field, the original property field(s) will

still remain so that the source data will still exist on its own. The copied /merged data can be

output into either another existing property field (column) or it can be placed into a new column.

This option is only available when Advanced Mode is enabled.

To Merge/Duplicate a Column:

1. Select a folder in Explorer View, or select one or more items in Items View.

2. Right-click and choose Metadata Modifications > Merge/Duplicate Columns option to display

the Copy or Merge Columns dialog.

Page 68: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

68Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

3. In the Available Columns list, select the columns to copy or merge.

4. Use the left and right arrow buttons to move columns from the Available Columns list to theSelected Columns list. Use the up and down arrow buttons to change the order of columns inthe Selected Columns list.

5. Either:

· Select an an existing column into which you want to merge the data from the Output

Column drop-down

OR

· Click [New] and add a new column into which to copy data.

6. The resulting data can either be placed from an existing column, selectable in the drop down

menu, or from a column. Please see the Adding, Editing, Deleting, and Displaying Properties

page for more details on adding a new property field.

7. If multiple property columns are being merged, enter a Separator to use between properties

The default separator values are

§ \t - This adds a tab space.

§ \n - this creates a new line.

§ \r\n - This adds a carriage return and new line.

8. Click [OK] when ready to continue.

The columns and their data will now be copied into the new or existing column using the specified

settings, and the original source data will still exist in the source columns.

Page 69: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

69Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

Using Excel Files for Source Content Editing

You can use Metalogix Content Matrix to export and import content to/from Microsoft Excel. Data

can be exported to an Excel file for editing, and data within an Excel file can be imported into

Metalogix Content Matrix provided that the items have a MetalogixID or SourceURL value. This

ability is similar to the CSV Import/Export functionality within Metalogix Content Matrix.

NOTE: The Excel export/import feature will only work for the XLSX file type. Currently the XLS file

type is not supported.

The Standard Use Case for Working with Excel

The standard use case for using Excel in conjunction with File Share Editions is as follows:

A. First connect to the File Share source and SharePoint target environments.

B. Then in Metalogix Content Matrix's Items View add any additionally desired columns. This can

include SharePoint choice, lookup, managed metadata columns, etc.

C. After all of the desired columns have been added, export a set (or all) of items and metadata

to an Excel file. What metadata columns are included can be chosen at the time of the export.

D. Send the file to the appropriate people within the organization for editing. This editing can

consist of changing existing values or selecting new values for added SharePoint columns.

E. The modified Excel file would then be imported back into Metalogix Content Matrix, and all of

the changes would be populated for each item. The import process provides a set of options

that can help you determine the type of data that will be included in the import action, such as

replacing existing values with blank values, adding new columns to Metalogix Content Matrix's

Items View, etc.

F. All of the items and data within Metalogix Content Matrix Console - File Share Edition will now

be updated, and this updated content can be migrated into SharePoint.

A similar set of steps can be taken to export and import the folder structure of the source File

Share, allowing users more control over configuring the migration hierarchy structure.

Exporting File Share Content to Excel

What to Expect from an Exported Excel File

In an exported Excel file there are a few things to note. The first is that only the selected

columns/fields will be included in the export. So if a column, or group of columns from Metalogix

Content Matrix were excluded in the export process, those columns will not be listed in the

Page 70: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

70Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

resulting Excel file. Any exported Excel file will also include a MetalogixID column. This column (or

the SourceURL column) is used to identify and match items in the Excel sheet with the same items

in Metalogix Content Matrix. One of these columns must be used when importing an Excel file. It is

also worth noting that the Excel Export/import supports most column types, include SharePoint

columns that are manually added into Metalogix Content Matrix. Only SharePoint BCS columns are

not supported.

Note that there are two tabs at the bottom of the Excel sheet. They are:

· Bulk Data Entry - This tab will display all of the column values for each item. When users try to

set a column value for an item, and that column is a choice or lookup column, then a drop

down menu will open so users can select the desired entry from the list (instead of requiring

the user to know what the valid entries are).

There are a few special cases for this, mainly the SharePoint columns for Managed Metadata,

Choice, and Lookups. In the case of managed metadata (taxonomy) columns the drop down

will display all of the available values within the Term Store that the column is configured for.

Any hierarchy structure within the Term Store will be displayed by having a ">" separating the

different hierarchy levels. SharePoint Choice and Lookup columns will also list all of the

possible values from a drop down list. If these columns support multiple values, then a text

box will be displayed instead, and users can enter the values into the textbox, separated by a

semi-colon (";")

Date/Time values will be displayed in the "mm/dd/yyyy h:mm AM/PM" format. So a date of

August 14, 2013 at 9:25 in the morning would be displayed as "08/14/2013 9:25 AM".

· _Reference Values - This tab will contain all of the reference values for any SharePoint

Managed Metadata (taxonomy), Choice, and/or Lookup columns. It is recommended that

users DO NOT manually add any values to this page, it is only there for reference and to help

populate any drop down menu values on the Bulk Data Entry tab.

To export file metadata to Excel:

1. In Explorer View, select the folder that contains the content to export.

2. Select the appropriate option. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

If you want to

export ...

Then ...

a folder structureright-click and choose Metadata Modifications > Excel Actions > Export

Directory to an Excel File.

Page 71: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

71Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

If you want to

export ...

Then ...

folder metadata right click and choose Metadata Modifications > Excel Actions > Export

Content to an Excel File.

This option is only available when Advanced Mode is enabled.

metadata for

individual items§ Switch to Items View, then select the specific items whose metadata

exported

§ Right-click and choose: Metadata Modifications > Excel Actions >

Export Content to an Excel File.

This option is only available when Advanced Mode is enabled.

Page 72: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

72Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

If you want to

export ...

Then ...

3. In the Output file field, either:

§ enter the file path to which that the Excel file should be saved

OR

§ click [Browse] and navigate to the desired save location.

NOTE: If you manually enter the file name, you will need to include the ".xlsx" extension.

4. In the Select property columns to export window, select all of the properties that should be

exported to the Excel file.

The properties are listed in a series of top level, and second level nodes. The top level node

represents the category that the column falls into. When these nodes are expanded, all of the

available column for that category will be listed. You can either select the top level category

node, which will select all of the column nodes under it, or individual column nodes. Only

checked nodes will be included in the Excel export.

5. Use the information in the following table to determine the appropriate action to take.

If ... Select ...

· you chose to Export Directory

AND

· you want to export metadata for all of

the items in the selected folder, as well as

all of the items for any sub-folders

Include metadata from sub-folders.

NOTE: If this option is not selected, only

metadata for items at the top level of the

selected folder will be exported.

Page 73: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

73Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

· you chose to Export Content

AND

· you want the column type (i.e. Text, Date

Time, User, etc.) to display next to the

actual columns title

Include column type information in Excel

headers.

NOTE: If this option is not selected, then

only the column title will be included in

each columns header.

6. Click [OK] to start the file export.

When the export starts a status box will be displayed. The logs for the export can be viewed (in

progress or after the action is finished) by clicking] [Details>>]. After the action has completed a

note will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the dialog stating the number of records that

were exported into the Excel file, as well as any warnings or errors that may have been

encountered (if there were any).

The exported file can now be distributed for editing.

Importing File Share Content from Excel

Importing folder metadata from an Excel file allows you to take any edited or added metadata for

an item, and re-sync it with content that has already been imported into Metalogix Content Matrix.

This allows you to help customize your content for migration to SharePoint.

NOTES:

· Excel files can only be imported on the top level File Share node (the connection node)

· Any imported content must have a MetalogixID and/or a SourceURL.

· Values for any "Read-only" fields will not be imported as they cannot be edited.

To Import Items from CSV:

1. Select the top level connection node for the project connection/web content (the root node).

2. Select the appropriate option. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

If you want to import a previously

exported ...

Then ...

folder structure fileright-click and choose Metadata Modifications

> Excel Actions > Export Directory to an Excel

File.

folder metadata file right click and choose Metadata Modifications >

Excel Actions > Export Content to an Excel File.

Page 74: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

74Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

If you want to import a previously

exported ...

Then ...

This option is only available when

Advanced Mode is enabled.

metadata for individual items§ Switch to Items View, then select the

specific items whose metadata exported

§ Right-click and choose: Metadata

Modifications > Excel Actions > Export

Content to an Excel File.

This option is only available when

Advanced Mode is enabled.

3. In the Source file field at the bottom of the dialog, either:

§ enter the file path and name for the Excel file that should be imported

OR

§ click [Browse] and navigate to the location where the Excel file resides.

4. Select the applicable check box options. Use the information in the following table for

guidance.

If you want to ... Select ...

ignore the internal unique ID assigned to the

metadata entry (the MetalogixID field) in

favor of the file path of the associated file

(the SourceURL field)

Find existing Items by SourceURL, rather than

MetalogixID.

NOTE: When importing data from an Excel

file, Metalogix Content Matrix need to be

able to identify what data goes with what

item. In order to do this a synchronization is

done on one column (the MetalogixID

Page 75: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

75Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

column by default) so the remaining data is

correctly paired up with the item it belongs

to.

This option is useful when moving metadatabetween Projects as the unique IDs will bedifferent.

overwrite any existing values in a column

field with a blank value, if that field already

contains a non-blank value

Allow overwriting non-empty fields with

empty values.

NOTE: If this option is not selected, then any

fields that already contain a value will retain

that same value, even if the imported file

has a blank value for the same field.

allow for new properties (columns) to be

added in the specific project connect

Allow creating new properties.

NOTE: If this option is not selected, then any

new columns that have been added to the

file will not be added under the specific

project connection node.

log details of any failures that occur when

trying to import an Excel file

Enable logging for failed imports only

(Recommended).

open an Import From CSV Preview dialog

before the actual import action is run

Preview before importing.

NOTE: This dialog will list each column that

is included in the Excel file. It will also list the

column type within the file and the column

type in the specific connection, so you can

see if there are any discrepancies. The

Status column will also list if there are any

mismatches in the column type between the

two, or if the column types match. This gives

you a chance to see if there are any

potential issues for importing the content.

5. Click [OK] to start the Excel file import action.

If the Preview before importing option has been checked, the Import From Excel Preview

dialog displays. After [Import] is clicked, the import process will continue.

When the import starts a status box will be displayed. The logs for the import can be viewed (in

progress or after the action is finished) by clicking [Details>>]. After the action has completed a

note will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the dialog stating the number of records that

Page 76: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

76Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

were imported, as well as any warnings or errors that may have been encountered (if there were

any). .

The imported file will now update the specific project connection with its data.

Using CSV Files for Content Editing

You can export and import file properties to a CSV file for editing by stakeholders. Once the

resulting CSV file has been created, it can be distributed to the necessary users for editing and

updating. Once edited, the CSV can be imported back into Metalogix Content Matrix, and the

modified data will be updated or populated in the specific project connection.

These options are only available when Advanced Mode is enabled.

Exporting Source Content to a CSV File

Exporting file metadata to a CSV allows easy editing of properties in spreadsheet software (such as

Microsoft Excel). Once changes have been made, you can import the CSV and all its changes back

into the specific project connection (updating the existing fields and adding any new ones).

NOTE: Metadata can be exported to a CSV file for both File Share and SharePoint connections. In

the case of the source File Share environment users can export the item and folder metadata. For

a SharePoint environment users can export metadata for SharePoint sites and document libraries

to a CSV. The export process is fairly similar, however, there are a few different options that are

available between a File Share and SharePoint export. The process for each connection type are

described below.

CSV Export Options

There are two export to CSV options:

· Export Content(s) to CSV File exports the metadata for any selected folder or document from

the File Share Source in the Explorer View or Items View. This option is the only way to export

folder metadata, and is primarily used for exporting metadata for specific items (selected in

the Items View tab), or for exporting metadata for folders.

· Export Directory to CSV File is only available when selecting a folder node in the Explorer View

tab, and will export the metadata for any documents under the selected node, including

documents in any sub-folder structure. Metadata for folders themselves will not be exported

with this option, only metadata for documents will be exported. This option is primarily used

for exporting the metadata of all items under a selected folder , or for exporting all items

within a folder hierarchy.

Page 77: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

77Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

To Export Source Content Metadata to CSV:

1. Select the content that you want to export to a CSV file. This can either be selecting a node in

the Explorer View, or switching to the Items View and selecting specific items.

2. Right click and choose Actions > Export Contentto CSV File (or CSV Actions > Export Documents

to CSV File). To display the Export to CSV File dialog.

3. In the Output file field, either:

§ enter the file path to which that the CSV file should be saved

OR

§ click [Browse] and navigate to the desired save location.

NOTE: If you manually enter the file name, you will need to include the ".csv" extension.

4. In the Select property columns to export window, select all of the properties that should be

exported to the CSV file.

The properties are listed in a series of top level, and second level nodes. The top level node

represents the category that the column falls into. When these nodes are expanded, all of the

available column for that category will be listed. You can either select the top level category

node, which will select all of the column nodes under it, or individual column nodes. Only

checked nodes will be included in the CSV export.

5. If Include column type information in the CSV headers is selected, each included column's

column type (i.e. Text, Date Time, User, etc.) will be included next to the actual columns title. If

this check-box option is not selected, then only the column title will be included in each

columns header.

6. Click [OK] to start the CSV file export.

When the CSV export starts a status box will be displayed. The logs for the export can be viewed

(in progress or after the action is finished) by clicking] [Details>>]. After the action has completed a

note will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the dialog stating the number of records that

Page 78: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

78Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

were exported into the CSV, as well as any warnings or errors that may have been encountered (if

there were any).

The exported CSV file can now be distributed for editing.

To export SharePoint metadata to CSV:

NOTE: Only SharePoint documents ore pages can have metadata exported to a CSV file.

1. In Explorer View, select a SharePoint site node or a document library (or Pages library).

2. Right-click and choose CSV Action > Export Web Metadata to CSV File (or CSV Action > Export

Metadata to CSV File). to display the Configure Metadata Export to CSV dialog.

3. In the Output file field, either:

§ enter the file path to which that the CSV file should be saved

OR

§ click [Browse] and navigate to the desired save location.

NOTE: If you manually enter the file name, you will need to include the ".csv" extension.

4. In the Select property columns to export window in the dialog, select all of the properties that

should be exported to the CSV file.

The properties are listed in a series of top level, and second level nodes. The top level node

represents the category that the column falls into. When these nodes are expanded, all of the

available column for that category will be listed. You can either select the top level category

node, which will select all of the column nodes under it, or individual column nodes. Only

checked nodes will be included in the CSV export.

5. Select the applicable check box options. Use the information in the following table for

guidance.

If you want to ... Select ...

Page 79: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

79Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

automatically add all columns that are

available in the selected node (and

depending on the other selected check-

box options, also the columns from any

sub content structure)

Export all columns.

NOTE: This option is only available if a site

node has been selected.

run the column and metadata extraction

process down through any sub-sites that

may exist under the selected SharePoint

site

Recurse into subwebs.

NOTE: This option is only available if a site

node has been selected.

include the metadata from any sub-

folders that are within document libraries

or pages libraries, under the selected node

Include metadata from sub-folders.

6. Click [OK] to start the CSV file export.

When the CSV export starts a status box will be displayed. The logs for the export can be viewed

(in progress or after the action is finished) by clicking] [Details>>]. After the action has completed a

note will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the dialog stating the number of records that

were exported into the CSV, as well as any warnings or errors that may have been encountered (if

there were any).

The exported CSV file can now be distributed for editing.

Importing CSV Files

Importing file metadata from a CSV file allows you to take any edited or added metadata for an

item, and re-sync it with content that has already been imported into Metalogix Content Matrix.

This allows you to help customize your content for migration to SharePoint. For example, you can

add a set of columns to the CSV file, import these columns into Metalogix Content Matrix, and then

use them to map and populate values on the SharePoint target.

NOTE: CSV files can only be imported on the top level File Share node (the connection node).

To Import Items from CSV:

1. Select the top level connection node for the project connection/web content (the root node).

2. Right click and choose CSV Actions > Import Documents from a CSV File to display the CSV File

dialog.

Page 80: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

80Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

3. In the Source file field at the bottom of the dialog, either:

§ enter the file path and name for the CSV file that should be imported

OR

§ click [Browse] and navigate to the location where the CSV resides.

4. Select the applicable check box options. Use the information in the following table for

guidance.

If you want to ... Select ...

ignore the internal unique ID assigned to

the metadata entry (the MetalogixID field)

in favor of the file path of the associated file

(the SourceURL field)

Find existing Items by SourceURL, rather

than MetalogixID.

NOTE: When importing data from a CSV file,

Metalogix Content Matrix need to be able to

identify what data goes with what item. In

order to do this a synchronization is done on

one column (the MetalogixID column by

default) so the remaining data is correctly

paired up with the item it belongs to.

This option is useful when moving metadatabetween Projects as the unique IDs will bedifferent.

overwrite any existing values in a column

field with a blank value, if that field already

contains a non-blank value

Allow overwriting non-empty fields with

empty values.

NOTE: If this option is not selected, then any

fields that already contain a value will retain

that same value, even if the imported CSV

has a blank value for the same field.

Page 81: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

81Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

allow for new properties (columns) to be

added in the specific project connect

Allow creating new properties.

NOTE: If this option is not selected, then any

new columns that have been added to the

CSV file will not be added under the specific

project connection node.

log details of any failures that occur when

trying to import a CSV file

Enable logging for failed imports only

(Recommended).

open an Import From CSV Preview dialog

before the actual import action is run

Preview before importing.

NOTE: This dialog will list each column that is

included in the CSV file. It will also list the

column type within the CSV file and the

column type in the specific connection, so

you can see if there are any discrepancies.

The Status column will also list if there are

any mismatches in the column type between

the two, or if the column types match. This

gives you a chance to see if there are any

potential issues for importing the content.

5. Click [OK] to start the CSV file import action.

If the Preview before importing option has been checked, the Import From CSV Preview dialog

displays. After [Import] is clicked, the import process will continue.

When the CSV import starts a status box will be displayed. The logs for the import can be viewed

(in progress or after the action is finished) by clicking [Details>>]. After the action has completed a

note will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the dialog stating the number of records that

were imported into the CSV, as well as any warnings or errors that may have been encountered (if

there were any).

The imported CSV file will now update the specific project connection with its data.

Comparing Source and Target Content

You can use Metalogix Content Matrix to run a comparison action between a source File Share

node, and a target SharePoint node. This allows you to run a comparison between a File Share

source and an existing SharePoint target to determine if the selected locations are the same (i.e.

they are synced).

Page 82: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

82Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

To Compare source and target columns:

1. In Explorer View, navigate to the desired File System directory node against which you want to

run the compare action.

2. Right-click and choose Compare Directory to display the Compare Directory to SharePointWeb/List dialog.

3. Select the SharePoint site, list or folder on which to run the compare action.

NOTE: If you would like to select a different source file system directory that the compare

should be run against, click Show Explorer to show only the file system connections. Click

Hide Explorer to re-display SharePoint connections.

4. Click [OK] to start the compare action.

When the action starts, a Job log will be created. The logs can be viewed (in progress or after the

action is finished) by clicking [Details>>]. After the action has completed a note will be displayed in

the bottom left corner of the dialog stating the number of completions, as well as any warnings or

errors that may have been encountered (if there were any).

Once the action is complete the logs will display the results of the compare. You can find more

details of the individual results in the Log Item Details dialog, under the Information and Details

fields.

Extracting Source Content from PropertyColumns

You can pull out (extract) a specific set of data from within an existing source property column and

place it within another property column for an entire folder or individual items.

Only results that can be pulled directly from the item's metadata value will be returned when the

extraction is run. This type of extraction can be useful for pulling content from a single item, or

pulling a set of content from all items at one time.

Before an extraction action is started, make sure you have a good, clear idea of what content is to

be extracted.

This option is only available when Advanced Mode is enabled.

To Extract Content from a Property:

1. In Explorer View, select the folder that contains the content you want to extract.

2. To display the Extract Content from Property dialog, use on of the following options:

§ To extract content from the entire folder, right, click and choose Metadata Modifications >

Extract Content from Property.

Page 83: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

83Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

§ To extract content from one or more items, switch to Items View, select the item(s) and

choose Metadata Modifications > Extract Content from Property.

3. Enter the search parameter in the Find field.

4. This can be an XPath query, plain text, a number value, part of a user name, etc

Select a Search value from the drop-down.

5. Select a Search Logic option, based on the type of data that you want to extract. Options are:

§ XPath Query - If the property contains XML, an XPath query can be used to extract

information.

§ Regular Expression - Uses a "Regular Expression" search expression to find text.

When this options is selected the Multiline option becomes available and, if checked,

regular expressions will search past new line characters.

§ Text Search - Runs a text search through the selected property field, looking for a value that

matches the text in the Find option.

When this option is selected the Match Case option becomes available which, if checked

will make the search case sensitive.

6. If you want to run the extraction on any sub-folders under the currently selecte folder, check

the Recursive box

7. Set the desired Extract option. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

If you want to ... Then ...

count the number of matches Metalogix

Content Matrix can find in the source content

select Counts only.

Page 84: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

84Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

If you want to ... Then ...

that matches to the Find value and enter that

number in the selected output column

For example, if a property column contains

values that are written in HTML, and you

want to find out how many "<P>" tags are in

the property value, you can enter an XPath

query to select all "<P>" tags, and run the

extraction. The number of "<P>" tags in that

property column value will be returned in the

selected column. So if there are five

paragraphs in the property value, the

extraction will enter "5" in the selected

output property column.

search for and extract the first match value

found for each item

First Match Only.

search through the selected content and

extract all values that match the Find value

and appended them as a string of text into

the output property column

All matching results.

8. If you selected All matching results, enter a Separater value so that each returned result will be

separated within the same cell in the Workspace:

§ ; - Adds a semi-colon between results.

§ : - Adds a colon between results.

§ \t - Adds a "Tab" between results.

§ \n - Places the new results on a new line.

§ \r\n - Adds a carriage return and new line between results.

9. If you elected XPath Query as the Search Logic, set the desired Format option:

§ Text - When selected, this option will run the search through the text level of the code

(within the property value), and the output will only contain the text, and not any of the

actual code. For example, in the xml node: <xml><inner>text</inner></xml> the returned

extracted value would be "text."

§ Inner XML - When selected, this option will search and extract any text values as well as any

of the inner XML coding. For example, in the xml node: <xml><inner>text</inner></xml>

the returned extracted value would be "<inner>text</inner>."

§ Outer XML - When selected, this option will return all of the xml code that matches the

XPath value. For example, in the xml node: <xml><inner>text</inner></xml> the returned

extracted value would be"<xml><inner>text</inner></xml>."

Page 85: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

85Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

10. In the Extract to column drop down menu, select a new or existing property column that the

data will be extracted into.

If a target column for the extraction does not already exist, click [New] and add the column.

11. Click [Run] to run the extraction immediately or save a copy of the settings to a job file, which

displays in the Job List section. You can then:

§ run a migration directly from the Jobs List section

OR

§ schedule the job to run at a specified time, either as a Windows Scheduled Task or straight

from PowerShell.

Extracting MS Office File Properties for ItemsWithin a File Share Connection

Metalogix Content Matrix can crawl and re-import File System data for any items listed within the

File Share connection, including any Microsoft Office metadata that may exist for files.

This option is only available when Advanced Mode is enabled.

To extract MS Office File Properties:

1. In either Explorer View or Items View, select the folder/files for which you want Metalogix

Content Matrix to crawl for metadata.

2. Right-click and choose Metadata Modification > Extract MS Office File Properties option to

display the Extract File Metadata dialog.

3. If you selected a folder and want the extraction to run on all sub-folder of the selected FileShare node, make sure the Run recursively on sub-folders box is checked.

4. To run the metadata crawl action, click [OK].

When the action starts, a Job log will be created. The logs can be viewed (in progress or after the

action is finished) by clicking [Details>>]. After the action has completed a note will be displayed in

the bottom left corner of the dialog stating the number of completions, as well as any warnings or

errors that may have been encountered (if there were any).

Page 86: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

86Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

Adding SharePoint Lookup and Choice Columnsto File Share Connections

You can add SharePoint lookup and choice columns to items in a FileShare connection and pre-

populate their values prior to migration. These lookup columns are existing columns from the

SharePoint target environment, and must already exist (and have all of the desired values). This

option allows users to add, and pre-populate values for the lookup column in Metalogix Content

Matrix before a migration is run.

Adding lookup and choice columns is not supported from a Native Web Service

(NWS) connection.

Before You Can Add a Lookup or Choice Column to a File ShareConnection:

The column must already exist in the target SharePoint environment. In the case of a choice field,

all possible choices must also exist.

NOTE: Make note of the url of the SharePoint site or list containing the column you want to add,

as you will need to specify it when adding the column

To add a SharePoint Lookup or Choice column to a FileShareconnection:

1. In Explorer View, select the folder in the File Share connection to which you want to add the

column

NOTE: Any column that is added to a folder within a File Share connection will be available

under all folders within that connection.

2. Switch to Items View.

3. To display the Add Column dialog, in the Items View toolbar either:

· Click Manage Columns to display the Manage columns dialog, then click the Add icon.

OR

· From the Manage Columns drop-down, select New Column.

Page 87: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

87Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

4. Enter a Property Name.

CAUTION: Once the column is created, the Property Name cannot be changed.

5. For Type select the applicable option:

§ SharePoint Lookup

OR

§ SharePoint Choice

6. The Configure... dialog for the option you selected displays.

7. In the SharePoint Connection drop-down, select the target SharePoint connection that containsthe SharePoint lookup or choice column that you want to add to the File Share connection.

8. Enter the SharePoint Site or List Url that contains the lookup or choice column.

Page 88: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

88Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

NOTE: If a list URL is entered in this field, then Metalogix Content Matrix will only look at list

columns. If a site URL is entered in this field, then Metalogix Content Matrix will only look at

site columns, including columns that are inherited in the hierarchy structure.

9. Click [Populate Columns]. This will allow Metalogix Content Matrix to search the specifiedSharePoint site or list, using the selected connection, to find all of the "lookup" or "choice"fields. If the site or list doesn't contain any, users will be provided with a message indicatingthat they need to select another site or list.

10. Once the SharePoint Lookup (or Choice) Column drop-down has been populated, select acolumn from the list.

11. Click [OK] to return to the Add Columns dialog.

12. (Optional) Enter a Description of the property.

13. Select a Category under which to place the new column (Misc. is the default value.)

14. (Optional) Enter a Display Name for the property.

NOTE: If this field is left blank, Metalogix Content Matrix will use the Property Name as the

display name.

15. Click [OK] to add the new column to the File Share connection.

16. Continue with Setting Lookup or Choice Column Values.

NOTE: Any lookup or choice columns that are added will only be Refreshed if the main connection

node for the SharePoint environment that the column is from has been refreshed.

Setting Lookup or Choice Column Values

Once a lookup or choice column has been added to the File Share connection, you can set values

for a single file or for multiple documents at a time.

NOTE: You can also set values using CSV files for content editing.

To set lookup or choice values on a single File Share file:

1. In the Explorer View, navigate to the folder that contains the items for which you want to set

lookup or choice values.

2. Switch to the Items View and locate the column for which you want to set values.

3. Double-click on the cell for the appropriate file to enable a drop-down which contains all of the

valid values for the column.

4. Select a value from the drop-down.

NOTE: If the field supports multiple selections for a single item, you can select additional

values.

Page 89: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

89Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

5. When you are finished, press <ENTER>.

The value will now be set for that file.

To set lookup or choice values for multiple documents at one time:

1. In the Explorer View, navigate to the folder that contains the items that for which you want to

set lookup or choice values.

2. Switch to Items View and locate the olumn for which you want to set values.

3. Click [Show Properties] in the upper right corner of the Items View to display the Property Grid.

4. Select all the files for which you want to set values.

5. Locate the lookup or choice column in the Property Grid.

6. Click on the appropriate property field.

7. Select a value from the drop-down

NOTE: This method will only work for items that already have the same value set (ie. all set to

"Lookup 1", all have no value, etc.), and will set the chosen value for all selected items. If the

field supports multiple selections for a single item, you can select additional values.

8. Press <ENTER>.

Mapping and Migrating Lookup and ChoiceValues

To include new lookup and choice columns when configuring your migration:

· make sure the values have been applied to the migrating items

· map the columns on the source to the SharePoint columns of the same type on the target.

Linking Source Columns to SharePoint ManagedMetadata

You can use Metalogix Content Matrix to create special columns that are linked to SharePoint

Taxonomy. With these columns, you can attribute Managed Metadata terms to your documents

prior to migration. At migration time, these terms will be brought across and applied to your

migrated documents.

Introduction to SharePoint Taxonomy Columns in SharePoint2010/2013/2016

Taxonomy (also referred to as Managed Metadata) is a feature of SharePoint 2010/2013/2016 that

allows certain metadata to be managed centrally as part of the SharePoint administration.

Page 90: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

90Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

Taxonomy features are not available in SharePoint 2010/2013 Foundation or any earlier version of

SharePoint (such as MOSS 2007).

Metalogix Content Matrix supports retrieving taxonomy terms from a SharePoint 2010/2013/2016

server, attributing those terms to source documents, then applying those terms when content is

migrated. Additionally, new Managed Metadata columns can be created in target document

libraries during migration, based on predefined settings.

Currently, SharePoint Object Model (OM) and O365 Tenant connections are

supported. This includes connections using the Local OM (by installing locally on

the SharePoint server), or connections using the Extensions Web Service (remote

OM connections).

Applying Managed Metadata terms to migrated documents involves the following tasks:

A. Create a new SharePoint Taxonomy column to the source Metabase project.

B. Use the taxonomy column to attribute terms to the File System documents.

C. Map the source Taxonomy column to either an existing or a new Managed Metadata column

on SharePoint.

Creating Taxonomy Columns

Creating a SharePoint Taxonomy Value column is very similar to creating any other column in the

Metabase project.

To create a Taxonomy Value column:

1. Make sure you are connected to the target SharePoint server (currently only Local Object Modeland Metalogix Extensions Web Service connections are supported).

2. In Explorer View, select any directory under the source connection containing documents for

which you want to create a taxonomy column.

3. Switch to Items View.

4. Either:

· Select the drop down arrow next to the [Manage Column] button, and choose New Column

to display the Add Column dialog

OR

· Click [Manage Columns] to display the Manage Columns dialog then click the Add icon.

5. In the Property Name field, enter a name for the new taxonomy column.

6. In the Type drop down list, select the SharePoint Taxonomy option to display the Configure

SharePoint Taxonomy Column dialog.

Page 91: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

91Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

7. Specify the details of the term set to associated with this column. The details must be specified

in the following order.

a) SharePoint Connection - The active SharePoint connection from which to load term stores.

as each drop-down list populated based on the selection that precedes it.

Term Store - The parent Managed Metadata term store.

NOTE: You must already have Term Store Administrator permissions in order to

successfully select a term store. This permission must be added in the SharePoint Central

Administration, and is separate from Site Collection Administrator and Farm Administrator

permissions. Term Store Administrator permissions can be set under Application

Management > Manage Service Applications > Managed Metadata Service > [Managed

Metadata Service Application]. If the user account that is adding a column does not have

these permissions a message will be thrown indicating the lack of permissions.

b) Group - The parent Managed Metadata group.

c) Term Set - The term store to associate with this column.

NOTE: Each of these fields will automatically populate existing values base on the selection in

the previous field, for whatever SharePoint connection is selected.

There is also an Allow multiple values check-box option that you can select to allow the new

column to contain more than a single value. This option will be used if the new column is

mapped to a new Managed Metadata columns during migration.

8. Click [OK] to accept the selected term set.

9. Specify the Description, Category, and Display Name for this new SharePoint Taxonomy data

column.

NOTE: Only the Category option is required and will be set to Misc by default.

10. Click [OK] to close the dialog.

The new column has now been added to the Metabase project.

Page 92: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

92Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

Setting Taxonomy Values for File Share Columns

You can set taxonomy values on a single File Share file or for multiple documents at a time.

To set taxonomy values on a single File Share file:

1. Make sure you are connected to the target SharePoint server (currently only Local Object Modeland Metalogix Extensions Web Service connections are supported).

2. In the Explorer View, navigate to the folder that contains the items for which you want to set

taxonomy values.

3. Switch to the Items View and locate the taxonomy column for which you want to set values.

4. Double-click on the cell for the appropriate file to make the cell editable.

5. Begin typing the desired value.

6. As you type, available taxonomy terms that are loaded from the SharePoint server will be

suggested as options.

7. When you are finished, press <ENTER>.

The taxonomy value will now be set for that file.

To set taxonomy values for multiple documents at one time:

1. Make sure you are connected to the target SharePoint server (currently only Local Object Modeland Metalogix Extensions Web Service connections are supported).

2. In the Explorer View, navigate to the folder that contains the items that for which you want to

set taxonomy values.

3. Switch to Items View and locate the taxonomy column for which you want to set values.

4. Click [Show Properties] in the upper right corner of the Items View to display the Property Grid.

5. Select all the files for which you want to set taxonomy.

6. Locate the taxonomy column in the Property Grid.

7. Click on the taxonomy property field.

8. Either:

§ Select a taxonomy value from the drop-down

OR

§ Manually enter a taxonomy value.

NOTE: If manually entering a term, the entered value must match the syntax that the

taxonomy column uses in order for the value to be correctly set.

Page 93: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

93Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

9. Press <ENTER>.

Mapping and Migrating Taxonomy Values

Once you have created a new SharePoint Taxonomy column to the source Metabase project and

set Taxonomy values to the File System documents, you can map the columns like any other

metadata when you configure your migration.

However, the following should be considered when setting up a mapping.

· The term set associated with the source SharePoint Taxonomy column must match the term

set associated with the target Managed Metadata column in SharePoint.

· Values in SharePoint Taxonomy columns can only be mapped to lists on the same SharePoint

instance to which the column is connected to.

· Mapping to a new column with a SharePoint Taxonomy column as the source will result in the

creation of a new Managed Metadata column that is associated with the same term set as the

source column. Additionally, the source column's Allow multiple values configuration will be

reflected in the new column.

Linking Source Columns to SharePoint ExternalData (BCS) Columns

Metalogix Content Matrix allows you to create special columns that are linked to a SharePoint

External Data (BCS) source. With these columns users can attribute external items to documents

prior to migration. At migration time, these terms will be applied to the migrated documents.

Overview of Business Connectivity Services (BCS) in SharePoint 2010and Later

Business Connectivity Services (also referred to as External Data) is a feature introduced in

SharePoint 2010 that enables the use of content from external data sources in SharePoint.

Metalogix Content Matrix supports retrieving External Items from a SharePoint BCS data source,

attributing those items to source documents, then applying those terms in an existing External

Data Column when content is migrated.

Currently, only connections over the SharePoint Object Model (OM) are supported.

This includes connections using the Local OM (by installing locally on the SharePoint

server), or connections using the Extensions Web Service (remote OM

connections).

Applying external items to migrated documents involves the following tasks:

Page 94: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

94Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

A. Create a new SharePoint External Data (BCS) column to your source Metabase project. This

column will be associated with a pre-defined SharePoint External Content Type.

B. Use the external data column to attribute terms to your documents.

C. When pasting your documents to your target, map the source Taxonomy column to an existing

External Data column on SharePoint.

Creating External Data (BCS) Columns

Creating a SharePoint External Data (BCS) column is very similar to creating any other column in

your Metabase project.

To create External Data (BCS) Columns:

1. Make sure you are connected to the target SharePoint server (currently only Local Object Modeland Metalogix Extensions Web Service connections are supported).

2. In the Explorer View, select any directory in your file system connection that contains

documents.

3. Switch to the Items View.

4. Either:

5. Select the drop down arrow next to the [Manage Column] button, and choose New Column to

display the Add Column dialog

OR

6. Click [Manage Columns] to display the Manage Columns dialog then click the Add icon.

5. Enter a Property Name for the BCS column.

6. For Type, select SharePoint External Data (BCS) from the drop-down to display the Select SPServer Connection dialog.

7. Specify the details of the SharePoint connection, and external content type the new columnshould be associated with. The details must be specified in the following order.

Page 95: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

95Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

a) SharePoint Connection - The active SharePoint connection from which to load external

content types.

b) External Content Type - The specific external content type to be associated with the

column.

c) Display Property - The external content type column that will be displayed.

8. Click [OK] to accept the selected external content type information and return to the Add

Column dialog.

9. Specify the Description, Category, and Display Name for this new external data column. Only

the Category option is required from these three fields, and it will be set to Misc by default.

10. Click [OK] to close the dialog, and create the new column.

The new column is added to your Metabase connection.

Setting External Data (BCS) Column Values

You can set external (BCS) values on a single File Share file or for multiple documents at a time.

To set BCS values on a single File Share file:

1. In the Explorer View, navigate to the folder that contains the items for which you want to set

BCS values.

2. Switch to the Items View and locate the BCS column for which you want to set values.

3. Double-click on the cell for the appropriate file to make the cell editable.

4. Begin typing the desired value.

As you type, available terms that are loaded from the SharePoint server will be suggested as

options.

5. When you are finished, press <ENTER>.

The BCS value will now be set for that file.

To set BCS values for multiple documents at one time:

1. In the Explorer View, navigate to the folder that contains the items that for which you want to

set taxonomy values.

2. Switch to Items View and locate the BCS column for which you want to set values.

3. Click [Show Properties] in the upper right corner of the Items View to display the Property Grid.

4. Select all the files for which you want to set BCS values.

5. Locate the BCS column in the Property Grid.

Page 96: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

96Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

6. Click on the appropriate property field.

7. Either:

§ Select a value from the drop-down

OR

§ Manually enter a value.

NOTE: If manually entering a term, the entered value must match the syntax that the column

uses in order for the value to be correctly set.

8. Press <ENTER>.

Mapping External Data (BCS) Values

Once you have created a new SharePoint BCS column to the source Metabase project and set BCS

values to the File System documents, you can map the columns like any other metadata when you

configure your migration.

However, the following should be considered when setting up a mapping.

· The external content type associated with the source SharePoint External (BCS) column must

match the content type associated with the target External Data column in SharePoint.

· Values in SharePoint External (BCS) columns can only be mapped to lists on the same

SharePoint instance to which the column is connected to.

· Mapping to a new column with a SharePoint External (BCS) column as the source will result in

the creation of a single line of text column in the SharePoint list.

Viewing and Editing Long String Column TypeValues

Metalogix Content Matrix - File Share Edition has a special dialog that allows you to edit Long String

column type values into more "readable" text prior to migration..

NOTE: A "Long String" column may be displayed as Read Only, however, these values can still be

edited.

To edit Long String column values:

1. In Explorer View, select the folder containing the items whose long string column values you

want to edit.

2. Switch to Items View.

3. Select the long string value that you want to edit

4. To display the Edit Text - Long String dialog, either:

Page 97: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

97Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

§ Double-click to enable editing.

OR.

§ Click the Show Properties icon then click the [...] button that displays to the right of theselected property.

5. In the Text Visualizer tab lets users edit the contents of the long string property.

NOTE: If the long string text value is in structure XML, the XHTML Visualizer tab becomes

available, which is useful for viewing the value as structured XML, as well as rendered content.

6. To view/edit a different long string column properties for the same item, select it from the

Property drop-down.

Note that only long-string properties are listed in this menu.

Creating a SharePoint Object

You can create new SharePoint site collections, sites, folders, and lists via the Metalogix Content

Matrix Console.

Creating a SharePoint Site

You can create a new SharePoint site via Metalogix Content Matrix under an existing site collection

or site except for Database connections and the new site can use any site template that is installed

on the SharePoint environment.

To create a new SharePoint site:

1. In the Explorer View, select the site collection or site under which you want to create the new

site.

2. Right-click and choose Create Site.

Page 98: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

98Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

The Create Site dialog displays, prompting you to enter the Site Title, Site URL Name,

Description, and Template for the new site.

NOTE: For Site Url Name, it is only necessary to enter the name of the site as you want it to

appear in the url, not the entire url path.

3. When you have completed the fields on the Create Site dialog, click [OK].

The new site will now display in Explorer View.

Create SharePoint Site Collection

You can create a new site collections on a target SharePoint environment for any SharePoint

connection type, except for database and site connections.

To create a new SharePoint site collection:

1. In the Explorer View navigate to the SharePoint Farm/ Web Application (On-Prem) or Tenant

(SharePoint Online) where the new site collection should be created.

2. Right-click and choose Create Site Collection, then select the desired mode:

§ For SharePoint on premises Farm there are two options for creating site collections:

§ Admin Mode

§ Self Service Mode

§ For a SharePoint Tenant, only the Admin Mode option is available.

Page 99: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

99Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

3. Complete the fields on the Create Site Collection dialog for the selected Mode as you would if

you were creating a site collection in native SharePoint.

NOTE: In addition, if you are creating a Site Collection in Admin Mode within a SharePoint on-

premises farm, you have the option to create a host named site collection using the Host

Header option. Refer to the Microsoft TechNet article details about host-named site

collections.

4. After completing the dialog, click [OK].

The new site collection now displays in the Explorer View.

Page 100: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

100Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

Create a SharePoint List

You can create a new SharePoint list via Metalogix Content Matrix under an existing site as long as:

· the connection type is not read-only, and

· the new list can use any site template that is installed on the SharePoint environment.

If site creation is not valid for the connection type, the option will be disabled.

To create a new list:

1. Navigate to the SharePoint Site where the list/library should be created.

2. Right-click and choose Create List.

3. Complete the Create List dialog as you would if you were creating a list in native SharePoint.

4. After completing the dialog, click [OK].

The new site collection now displays in Explorer View.

Page 101: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

101Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

Create SharePoint Folder

You can create a new SharePoint list via Metalogix Content Matrix under an existing list or library

(or within an existing folder) as long as the connection type is not read-only.. If folder creation is

not valid for the connection type, the option will be disabled.

To create a new SharePoint folder:

1. Navigate to the SharePoint Document Library, List, or Document Folder under which the new

folder should be created.

2. Right-click and choose Create Folder.

3. Complete the Create Folder dialog.

Note that the Folder Type drop down allows you to select the content type with which to create

the folder. if only one content type exists on that list/library/folder, the option will be grayed

out. There is also a check-box option to overwrite any existing folder that uses the same folder

name at the level the folder is being added.

Page 102: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

102Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

4. After completing the dialog, click [OK].

The new folder now displays in Explorer View.

Deleting a SharePoint Object

You can delete a SharePoint object via Metalogix Content Matrix as long as the connection type is

not read-only. SharePoint objects that can be deleted via Metalogix Content Matrix are:

· SharePoint Sites

· SharePoint Lists

· SharePoint Document Folders

· SharePoint Documents

· SharePoint List Items

If the action is not valid for the connection type, it will be disabled.

NOTE: Document versions and list item versions cannot be deleted via Metalogix Content Matrix.

To delete a SharePoint Object:

1. Select the SharePoint object to be deleted.

NOTE: Depending on the type of object, this may be in the Explorer View or in the Items View.

2. Either:

§ Press the Delete key on the keyboard.

§ Right-click on the object and choose Delete [Object].

Page 103: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

103Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

You will be prompted to confirm the action before continuing.

Viewing StoragePoint Details

Metalogix Content Matrix can display the Metalogix StoragePoint details for any document items

that have been offloaded to StoragePoint.

To view StoragePoint details:

1. In Explorer View, navigate to a SharePoint Document Library that contains items that have

been offloaded to StoragePoint.

2. Switch to the Items View tab.

3. Select an item, right-click and choose StoragePoint Details.

NOTE: The StoragePoint Details option will only be available in the menu if the selected items

have been offloaded into StoragePoint. If the selected item has not been offloaded to

StoragePoint the StoragePoint Details options will not be available. Only one item can be

selected at a time.

The Storage Point Details dialog provides the below information:

§ Address - The web address for the specified item within SharePoint.

Page 104: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

104Preparing for Your Migration

Content Matrix

§ Endpoint Relative Folder - The folder that has been configured as endpoint for the

offloaded item (i.e. the location of the item in the offloaded storage space).

§ Filename - The StoragePoint file name reference that is left behind in SharePoint after the

item has been offloaded.

4. When finished, click [Close].

Page 105: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

105Initiating a Migration

Content Matrix

Initiating a Migration

10

From the Metalogix Content Matrix Explorer View, you can "copy" an object from the source

connection then "paste" it to the appropriate location on the target connection. You will then be

prompted to configure Copy Options.

You can:

· Migrate a File Share Folder as a SharePoint site

· Migrate a File Share Folder as a document library

· Migrate File Share files as SharePoint documents

· Copy a SharePoint site or list as a File Share directory

Migrating a File Share Folder as a SharePoint Site

Use the Copy as Site action to migrate a File Share folder as a SharePoint site. Depending on the

migration options, any sub-folders will be migrated as SharePoint document libraries, or as sub-

sites.

To initiate a "File Share folder as a SharePoint site" migration:

1. In Explorer View, select the source File Share folder to migrate.

2. Right-click and choose Copy Folder.

3. Select the target SharePoint site node under which you want the new SharePoint site to be

created.

4. Right-click and choose Paste Folder > As Site option.

Continue with Configuring Copying Options.

Page 106: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

106Initiating a Migration

Content Matrix

Migrating a File Share Folder as a SharePointDocument Library

Use the Migrate as Document Library action to migrate a File Share folders as a SharePoint

document library or as a folder within an existing document library.

NOTE: Only File Share folders can be migrated as SharePoint document libraries. File Share files

and documents can only be migrated as documents into a SharePoint document library, unless

otherwise specified in the Configure Copy Options - Target Hierarchy Optionstab.

To initiate a "File Share folder as a SharePoint document library"migration:

1. In Explorer View, select the source File Share folder to migrate.

2. Right-click and choose Copy Folder.

3. Select the target SharePoint site/document library node under which to create the document

library/folder within the document library.

4. Depending on the target node you chose, right-click and choose either:

§ Paste Folder > As Document Library (to create a document library)

§ Paste Folder (to create a folder within the document library)

Continue with Configuring Copying Options.

Migrating File Share Files as SharePointDocuments

Use the Migrate Files action to migrate File Share files as SharePoint documents in a new or

existing document library.

To initiate a "File Share Files to a new or existing SharePointdocument library" migration:

1. In Explorer View, select the source File Share folder whose files you want to migrate.

2. Switch to Items View.

3. Select the files for migration (these files can be multi-selected).

4. Right-click and choose Copy Files.

5. Select the target SharePoint site or existing document library into which you want to migrate

the files.

6. Right-click and choose Paste Files.

Page 107: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

107Initiating a Migration

Content Matrix

Continue with Configuring Copying Options.

Copying a SharePoint Site or Documents into aFile Share

Use the Copy as File Share Directory action to copy SharePoint sites, document libraries and

documents into a File Share. This allows you to move content back and forth between SharePoint

and the File Share environment.

You can:

· copy SharePoint sites and document libraries into a File Share connection as a directory (folder)while maintaining the existing sub-structure

OR

· copy SharePoint documents as documents under a selected File Share node.

To copy a SharePoint site or document library as a File ShareDirectory

1. In Explorer View, select the SharePoint site or document library that you want to migrate.

2. Right-click and choose Copy Site or Copy List .

3. Select the target File Share directory.

4. Right-click and choose Paste Site > As Directory or Paste List > As Directory.

4. Continue with Configuring Copying Options.

To copy SharePoint documents into a File Share Directory:

1. In Explorer View, select the SharePoint document library that contains documents to be

migrated.

2. Switch to Items View.

3. Select the documents to be copied.

4. Right-click and choose Copy Selected Documents.

5. Select the target File Share directory.

6. Right-click and choose Paste Documents.

Continue with Configuring Copying Options.

Page 108: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

108Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

Configuring Copying Options

11

The Paste [Object] dialog provides a tabbed interface that enables you to configure a migration

according to your specifications. Available tabs will vary based on the type of migration that you

initiated.

Folder Options

If you chose to Migrate Folders as SharePoint Sites or Document Libraries,complete the Folder

options tab as described below.

To configure File Options:

1. If you want to Migrate sub-folders, make sure this box is checked.

NOTE: If you uncheck this box, only the folder from which you initiated the migration will be

copied.

2. For Replace invalid characters in file names with: select the character that you want to use as a

substitute for any characters disallowed by SharePoint.

3. Select the action that you want Metalogix Content Matrix to take If a folder with the same

name already exists on the target. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

Page 109: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

109Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

If you to ... Select ...

prevent Metalogix Content Matrix from

copying a folder from the source if a folder

with the same name already exists on the

target (in the same hierarchy structure)

Do not copy the folder.

allow Metalogix Content Matrix to overwrite

any existing folders on that target, if they

have the same name as a folder that is being

migrated

Overwrite the existing folder.

allow Metalogix Content Matrix to migrate

files and other folders directly into a folder

that already exists on the target, if a folder

with the same name is being migrated from

the source.

Use the existing folder.

allow Metalogix Content Matrix to migrate a

folder from the source, even if a folder with

the same name already exists on the target.

Copy the folder with a unique filename.

NOTE: If you select this option, the folder

from the source will be created on the target

using a unique name (typically the original

file name with "_1" appended). For example,

if a folder named "Marketing Programs" is

migrated from the source, and a folder with

the same name exists on the target, then a

new folder will be created on the target

called "Marketing Programs_1", and the

contents of the folder will be migrated into

this new folder.

4. Select the Content type options to use when setting the content type for any folders that are

migrated to SharePoint. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

If you want to ... Then ...

use the default SharePoint content type

for any migrated folders

select Use default content type (No folder

metadata).

specify the content type that should be

associated with folders when migrating

content.

· Select Use custom content type

AND

· Either:

Page 110: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

110Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

§ select an available content type from the

drop-down

OR

§ click [Edit Field Mappings] and specify

your own target content type using the

procedure for Mapping Field Types.

5. If you initiated the migration at the file (not folder level and are going to migrate content using

the Azure SPO Migration Pipeline, which provides higher migration speeds compared to non-

Azure migration actions, check the Use Azure/SPO Container Office 365 Upload box.

NOTE: Enable this option only if you are certain that the target environment is set up to use

the Azure pipeline.

One of two methods will be used to migrate using the Azure SPO Migration Pipeline:

§ If you have not manually set up and configured your own Azure containers, Metalogix

Content Matrix will use Azure Shared Containers, which requires that the content (and its

manifest) be encrypted. Therefore, to use this method, the Encrypt Azure/SPO Container

Jobs box must also be checked.

§ If you have manually set up and configured your own Azure containers, Metalogix Content

Matrix will continue to use the manual configuration method until it no longer detects the

changes made for the manual setup. (When using this method, Encrypt Azure/SPO

Container jobs, which will encrypt both data and associated manifest) is optional.

For information about manually setting up and configuring Azure containers, see the

Metalogix Content Matrix Performance Optimization Guide Including Powershell PDF

document included in the installation ZIP file.

The Azure SPO Migration Pipeline does not support migration to document sets. This option

will be disabled if a Migration to Document Set option is selected on the Target Hierarchy tab.

Page 111: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

111Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

File Options

If you have chosen to migrate folders or files, complete the File Options tab as described below.

Migrating Large Files

Metalogix Content Matrix can migrate large files up to the maximum size supported by the

SharePoint version on the target.

The migration of large files is supported for a SharePoint 2016/SharePoint Online

CSOM target connection and only if Optimistic Mode is not enabled.

If Metalogix Content Matrix encounters a file over a certain size threshold (200 MB by default), itmigrates the file in chunks (of 100 MB by default).IMPORTANT: If a large file is being migrated in chunks and you cancel the migration before the

entire file has been migrated, the file will be incomplete on the target and will remain in a checked

out state. You will need to re-migrate any affected file(s).

Page 112: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

112Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

To configure File Options:

1. If you want documents within a folder to be migrated, make sure the Include Files box is

checked

NOTE: This option cannot be unchecked if the migration was initiated for individual files.

2. For Replace invalid characters in file names with: select the character that you want to use as a

substitute for any characters disallowed by SharePoint.

3. Select the action that you want Metalogix Content Matrix to take If a file with the same name

already exists on the target. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

If you to ... Select ...

prevent Metalogix Content Matrix from

copying a file from the source if a file with

the same name already exists on the target.

Do not copy the file.

allow Metalogix Content Matrix to copy and

update the metadata for any files that are

migrated from the source, is a file with the

same name already exists on the target

Update the metadata on the existing file.

NOTE: Any files that do not meet this

criteria will be migrated normally.

allow Metalogix Content Matrix to overwrite

a file on the target if the file from the source

has a more recent Modified date

Overwrite the existing file if newer.

NOTE: This behavior will only be used if the

source and target fine names are the same.

Any other files will be migrated as normal.

allow Metalogix Content Matrix to migrate a

folder from the source, even if a folder with

the same name already exists on the target

Copy the file with a unique file name.

NOTE: The folder from the source will be

created on the target using a unique name

(typically the original file name with "_1"

appended). For example, if a folder named

"Marketing Programs" is migrated from the

source, and a folder with the same name

exists on the target, when this option is

selected a new folder will be created on the

target called "Marketing Programs_1" and

the contents of the folder will be migrated

into this new folder.

4. Select the Content type options to use when setting the content type for any files that are

migrated to SharePoint. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

Page 113: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

113Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

If you want to ... Then ...

use the default SharePoint content type

for any migrated files

select Use default content type

specify the content type that should be

associated with folders when migrating

content.

· Select Use custom content type

AND

· Either:

§ select an available content type from the

drop-down

OR

§ click [Edit Field Mappings] and specify

your own target content type using the

procedure for Mapping Field Types.

5. Select the appropriate File Rename options. Use the information in the following table for

guidance.

If you want to ... Then ...

all of the files from the source to be

migrated to the target with the same file

names that they currently use

select Do not rename files.

files from the source to be given new file

names on the target· Select Rename files using column

AND

· Select a data column from the drop down

whose values will be used as the new file

name when migrated to SharePoint.

NOTE: When selected, any values in the

specified column for each item will be used as

the new filename when migrated to

SharePoint. (These values may be populated

using one of the options for editing properties

when Preparing for Your Migration.)

6. If you initiated the migration at the file (not folder level and are going to migrate content using

the Azure SPO Migration Pipeline, which provides higher migration speeds compared to non-

Azure migration actions, check the Use Azure/SPO Container Office 365 Upload box.

NOTE: Enable this option only if you are certain that the target environment is set up to use

Page 114: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

114Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

the Azure pipeline.

One of two methods will be used to migrate using the Azure SPO Migration Pipeline:

§ If you have not manually set up and configured your own Azure containers, Metalogix

Content Matrix will use Azure Shared Containers, which requires that the content (and its

manifest) be encrypted. Therefore, to use this method, the Encrypt Azure/SPO Container

Jobs box must also be checked.

§ If you have manually set up and configured your own Azure containers, Metalogix Content

Matrix will continue to use the manual configuration method until it no longer detects the

changes made for the manual setup. (When using this method, Encrypt Azure/SPO

Container jobs, which will encrypt both data and associated manifest) is optional.

For information about manually setting up and configuring Azure containers, see the

Metalogix Content Matrix Performance Optimization Guide Including Powershell PDF

document included in the installation ZIP file.

The Azure SPO Migration Pipeline does not support migration to document sets. This option

will be disabled if a Migration to Document Set option is selected on the Target Hierarchy tab.

If you are copying files as part of a folder migration, this option will instead appear in the

Folder Options tab of the configuration dialog. This option only appears in the File Options tab

for the Paste Files action.

Mapping Field Types

You can create field type mappings for files and folders that are being migrated from a File Share

to SharePoint when you click the [Edit Field Mappings] button from the Folder Options or File

Options dialog. Mappings are applied to a specific content type on the SharePoint target, which is

determined within the migration's configuration options.

NOTE: Mappings are saved as a separate .MLM files, and the mappings are specific to the

particular mapping dialog (Field Types, Users, or Permissions.) they were saved from.

To configure field type mappings:

NOTE: Metalogix Content Matrix supports one-to-one field type mappings between source and

target.

Page 115: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

115Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

1. From the File drop-down at the top of the Source Fields to Content Type Fields dialog, choose

the appropriate option. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

If you want to ... Then...

load mappings from a previously-saved

Metalogix Mapping setting (.MLM) file· choose File > Load.

AND

· Navigate to and open the mapping file to

populate the Mappings dialog

create new mappings go to the next step.

2. Use the information in the following table to determine the appropriate action to take.

NOTE: You can Filter items in each window to narrow displayed lists.

If you want to ... Then...

manually map each individual source field

to a target SharePoint column· From the left (File System) window, select

the Item that you want to map.

· From the right (SharePoint Column)

window, select an available Item (for the

specified Content Type).

· Click the Map icon.

have Metalogix Content Matrix

automatically map source fields to target

SharePoint columns

· From the left (File System) window, select

the Item(s) that you want to map.

· Click the Auto icon.

Page 116: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

116Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

create a new column on the target for any

fields that are selected on the source side· From the left (File System) window, select

the Item that you want to map.

· Click the Target icon to display the New

Mapping Target dialog.

· Select whether you want the mapping to be

a List Column or Site Column, enter a name

for the column, and choose a column type

from the Group drop-down

NOTE: These mappings will display in blue in

the right (SharePoint Column) window.

The mappings you create will display in the bottom window. (Note that you can also Unmap

individually-selected mappings in the bottom window or Clear all mappings from the bottom

window.

3. To save the mappings in the dialog as a Metalogix Mapping setting (.MLM) file, choose File >

Save.

4. Click [OK] once all desired mappings have been made and return to the Configuration Options

dialog.

Permissions Options

With respect to SharePoint migrations, it is important to keep in mind that there are three different

aspects of permissions to be considered:

· Roles - These are also known as permission levels, and are a collection or rights that can be

assigned. In SharePoint it is possible to create custom permission levels (or custom roles).

· Securable Objects - These are basically permissions or rights that can be assigned to an object

in SharePoint. Only users or groups that have the same level of permissions or higher can

access the content holding these permissions.

· Principals - These are permission roles that are assigned to a user or group. In order for a user

or group to have access to a securable object, they would need to have the same permission

rights or higher as the permissions on the object. Users can also have access to secured object

if they are a part of a group that has access through its assigned permission level.

Metalogix Content Matrix can migrate the Principals, but is currently unable to migrate SharePoint

Roles or Securable Objects.

In the migration process Metalogix Content Matrix does not actually create any permissions, but

instead it maps the roles between the File Share source and the SharePoint target using it's

Permissions Mapping dialog. Any permissions that are not included in permissions mapping will

not be migrated to the SharePoint target environment.

Page 117: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

117Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

NOTE: If you want to use a custom role on the target you must add it to the target before

migrating permissions. However, this does not guarantee that it will be used. If another role on

the target has a closer match with the permission from the source, it will be used instead.

To configure Permissions Options:

1. To enable all user and permissions migration options, including the ability to edit users and any

user mappings that have been configured, check the Migrate users using explicit user mappings

box.

2. If you want to explicitly map source users to users in the target SharePoint object, click [Edit

Users] and follow the instructions for Mapping Users.

3. If you want to explicitly map source file system roles and the target SharePoint permissions:

a) Check the Migrate permissions using explicit permission mapping box, and:

b) Select the applicable option. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

If you want to ... Select ...

use all Permissions mappings that you

define, regardless of if there is any overlapMigrate permissions using explicit

permission mappings.

Page 118: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

118Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

with permissions that already exist om the

target

have an "optimization algorithm" run

against user roles on the source and target

and apply the least number of permissions

necessary to map all users from the source

Optimize permissions mappings to most

concise permissions set.

c) Click [Edit Permissions] and follow the instructions for Mapping Permissions.

4. If, as an alternative to explicit mapping, you want want Metalogix Content Matrix to compare

user rights/permissions on the source with the available permissions on the target, and use an

"estimation algorithm" to map the source user rights to the appropriate permission on the

target, check the Migrate permissions auto-mappings box.

Mapping Users

You can set user and group mappings for migrating content when you click the [Edit Users] button

from the Permissions Options tab. This allows you to preserve authorship metadata as well as

help integrate the File Share users with the SharePoint permissions model. In some cases it is

possible for users to be automatically imported into the SharePoint environment, however, this is

only possible if the File Share source and the target SharePoint environment are working from the

same Active Directory (AD). If this is not the case, then users would need to be mapped into

SharePoint user accounts on the target, and these accounts must already exist in order for them to

be mapped from the source.

NOTE: If the Author or Editor of any file to be migrated is Builtin\Administrators or BuiltIn\Users,

you must explicitly map the account to a user account in SharePoint for permissions to be applied

on the target. (There is no SharePoint equivalent to a BuiltIn account, so if it is not explicitly

mapped it will not be recognized as a valid user and permissions will not be applied.)

All user mappings are globally set, so once a mapping is created it will always be used unless

removed.

NOTE: Mappings are saved as a separate .MLM files, and the mappings are specific to the

particular mapping dialog (Field Types, Users, or Permissions.) they were saved from.

To map users:

NOTE: Metalogix Content Matrix supports many-to-one user mappings between source and

target.

Page 119: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

119Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

1. From the File drop-down at the top of the Active Directory Principal to SharePoint Principal

Mappings dialog, choose the appropriate option. Use the information in the following table for

guidance.

If you want to ... Then...

load mappings from a previously-saved

Metalogix Mapping setting (.MLM) file· choose File > Load.

AND

· Navigate to and open the mapping file to

populate the Mappings dialog.

save the mappings in the dialog as a

Metalogix Mapping setting (.MLM) file.

choose File > Save.

set the current permission mappings in the

dialog as the default permission mapping

(regardless of the source/target

connections being used)

choose File > Use as Current Default.

NOTE: the mappings that display in the dialog

are saved to the local machine, so they are

persistent whenever the application restarts.

2. Use the information in the following table to determine the appropriate action to take.

NOTE: You can Filter items in each window to narrow displayed lists.

If you want to ... Then...

manually map individual users or groups

on the source to a target SharePoint user

or group

· From the source list, select the Item(s) that

you want to map.

· From the target list, select a target Item.

· Click the Map icon.

Page 120: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

120Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

have Metalogix Content Matrix

automatically map source users/groups to

target SharePoint users/groups

· From the source list, select the Item(s) that

you want to map.

· Click the Auto icon.

NOTE: Metalogix Content Matrix will only

map users automatically if the source and

target side names match, or if the emails

match, and the source and target

environments are using the same AD.

The mappings you create will display in the bottom window. (Note that you can also Unmap

individually-selected mappings in the bottom window or or Clear all mappings from the bottom

window.

3. Click [OK] once all desired mappings have been made and return to the Configuration Options

dialog.

Mapping Permissions

You can map File Share roles into SharePoint permissions when you click the [Edit Permissions]

button from the Permissions Options tab. Any Allow Rights or Deny Rights permissions on the

source can be mapped to SharePoint permissions on the target, provided the user or group with

the permissions has been mapped and exists in the SharePoint environment. Metalogix Content

Matrix does not create any SharePoint permission levels, and can only map roles into existing

permissions.

Role mapping (permissions mapping) is only available if user mapping is enabled.

NOTE: Mappings are saved as a separate .MLM files, and the mappings are specific to the

particular mapping dialog (Field Types, Users, or Permissions.) they were saved from.

To map permissions:

NOTE: Metalogix Content Matrix supports many-to-one permissions mappings between

source and target.

Page 121: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

121Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

1. From the File drop-down at the top of the File System Rights to SharePoint Role Mappings

dialog, choose the appropriate option. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

If you want to ... Then...

load mappings from a previously-saved

Metalogix Mapping setting (.MLM) file· choose File > Load.

AND

· Navigate to and open the mapping file to

populate the Mappings dialog.

save the mappings in the dialog as a

Metalogix Mapping setting (.MLM) file.

choose File > Save.

set the current permission mappings in the

dialog as the default permission mapping

(regardless of the source/target

connections being used)

choose File > Use as Current Default.

NOTE: the mappings that display in the dialog

are saved to the local machine, so they are

persistent whenever the application restarts.

2. Map source roles to SharePoint permissions as follows:

· From the left (File System) window, select the Item(s) that you want to map.

· From the right (SharePoint) window, select an available Item).

· Click the Map icon.

Page 122: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

122Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

NOTE: You can Filter items in each window to narrow displayed lists.

The mappings you create will display in the bottom window. (Note that you can also Unmap

individually-selected mappings in the bottom window or Clear all mappings from the bottom

window.

3. Click [OK] once all desired mappings have been made and return to the Configuration Options

dialog.

Target Hierarchy Options

The Target Hierarchy Options tab lets you specify the hierarchical structure of migrated content on

the target SharePoint environment.

To configure Target Hierarchy - Subset options:

NOTE: This option is only available when migrating File Share content as a SharePoint site.

1. If you want to migrate source files into SharePoint subsites based on specified value, select the

appropriate option(s).

If you want to ... Then ...

Page 123: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

123Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

migrate source content into

SharePoint sub-sites based on the

source File Share's folder structure

select Migrate files to sub-site based on Source

directory structure.

If you also want Metalogix Content Matrix to use the

configured permissions migration settings that have

been set in the Permissions Options tab, check the

Copy permissions (based on configuration in

Permissionst ab) box.

create a SharePoint site and sub-site

structure based on values in a

selected source column

· select Migrate files to sub-site based on path in

column

AND

· select from the available list of columns in the

drop-down.

2. Select the appropriate Set new template option. Use the information in the following table for

guidance.

If you want to ... Then ...

use the same site template whenever a

new SharePoint site is created

· select All as:

AND

· select from the list of available SharePoint

site templates from the drop-down.

base the site template that is used on the

value in a selected source column· select From column

AND

· select from the available list of columns in

the drop-down.

NOTE: If the target hierarchy is being configured as a separate action (that is, via the Paste

Hierarchy option), you will also have the option to enable Azure/SPO Container options. For a

full migration, these options are available as either Folder Options or File Options.

Page 124: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

124Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

To configure Target Hierarchy - Document Library options:

1. For Migrate to Document Set, select how you want to migrate File System content into

SharePoint Document Sets. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

NOTES:

§ If you have chosen to Use Azure/SPO Container Office 365 Upload on either the Folder

Options or File Options tab, most of the options on the Document Library tab ill be disabled,

as the actions are not supported. See Objects Supported by the Azure Pipeline.

§ Please see Microsoft's Document Sets planning page for more basic details on document

sets.

If you want to ... Then ...

prevent Content Matrtix from migrating

documents into Document Sets

select Do not migrate files t document sets.

migrate content into SharePoint Document

Sets based on a specified file name

· select Migrate to Document Set based on

name in text:

AND

· enter the name you want to use for the

Document Set.

Page 125: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

125Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

migrate source content into SharePoint

Document Sets based on the vales in a

specified column

· select Migrate to Document Set based on

name in column.

AND

· select from the available list of columns in

the drop-down.

flatten the hierarchical structure of source

content and convert it to a Document Set

select Flatten folder hierarchy and convert to

Document Set.

2. For Migrate to Sub-Folders, select how you want File Share content to be migrated into sub-

folders in a SharePoint document library. Use the information in the following table for

guidance.

If you want to ... Then ...

migrate all files into the document library

on the target without creating any sub-

folder structure

select Do not use folder structure

NOTE: When this option is selected, all files

will be migrated to the root of the library,

even if there is an additional folder structure

on the source.

migrates any sub-folders into a SharePoint

document library based on the existing

folder structure in the source File Share

select Migrate files to sub-folder based on

source directory structure.

If you also want to migrate permissions to this

new hierarchy structure based on options set

in the Permissions Options tab, check the Copy

permissions (based on configuration in

Permissions tab) box.

migrate files and folders into a SharePoint

document library follow a folder structure

path that is determined by a specified

column

· select Migrate files to sub-folders based on

path in column

AND

· select from the available list of columns in

the drop-down.

3. For Document Library - Set document library name from:, select which SharePoint document

libraries the source contents (files and folders) will be migrated into on the target SharePoint

instance. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

NOTE: These options are only available when migrating content as a SharePoint site or

document library.

Page 126: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

126Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

If you want to ... Then ...

create a single SharePoint document

library based on a specified text value

· select Text field:

AND

· if different from the default (Documents) enter

a text you want to use for the library name.

create a SharePoint document library

and name it based on the name of the

source root directory/folder

(For example, if a source folder for the

migration is named "Root1" and this

folder contains two sub folders

("Child1" and "Child2"), then when

this option is selected, the top level

migrated site ("Root1") will have a

document library called "Root1," and

each sub-site will have a document

library named after their source

folders. In other words, the site

"Child1" will have a document library

called "Child1" and the site "Child2"

will have a document library called

"Child2.")

· select Source root directory name.

NOTE: This option is only available when

migrating content as a document library, or if

pasting hierarchy.

create a SharePoint document library

that uses the same name as the

source folder containing the

documents

select Source leaf directory name.

will create SharePoint document

libraries based on a value in a selected

column

· select Value in column

AND

· select from the list of available columns in the

drop-down.

Filter Options

In Metalogix Content Matrix, filters can be set and applied to items within the scope of a migration.

Metalogix Content Matrix uses inclusive filters, and these can be added and applied to any level of

a migration. Any filters that are set in a migration will be applied to all items within the scope of

Page 127: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

127Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

the migration. Multiple filters can be applied to each level of a migration.You can apply two types

of filters:

· File Metadata Filters, and

· Custom Metadata Filters.

Any filters that are set on this tab will override any existing root node filters for the current

migration only.

Link Correction Option

If you want to use Link Correction, make sure the Migrate Source Path (for link correction) box is

checked.

NOTE: When you check this box, Metalogix Content Matrix will create a column in the target

SharePoint document library containing the source path of the document.

Page 128: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

128Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

Logging Options

Logging Options let you specify the level of detail to include in the migration logs.

To configure Logging Options:

1. If you want more detailed logging for the migration action, make sure the Enable verbose

logging (may be memory intensive on larger copies) box is checked.

2. If you want to add a warning message to the logging when Metalogix Content Matrix

encounters an item that has a created date that more recent than the modified date, make

sure the Show warnings for documents with create dates > modified dates box is checked.

Page 129: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

129Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

StoragePoint Options

Metalogix Content Matrix - File Share Edition has the ability to migrate documents directly into

Metalogix StoragePoint, while leaving the endpoint reference in the appropriate SharePoint

location. These options are available through the StoragePoint options tab.

These options are only available when Advanced Mode is enabled.

When you navigate to the StoragePoint Options tab, a check will be automatically run on the target

SharePoint environment to see if Metalogix StoragePoint is installed. If StoragePoint is installed, all

of the options within the options tab will be enabled. If StoragePoint is not installed on the target

SharePoint environment, all of the options will be disabled. The StoragePoint detection status will

be displayed next to the StoragePoint found on target: line at the top of the tab window, and the

value will either be Yes or No.

NOTE: The StoragePoint options will only affect documents and attachments that are being

migrated into SharePoint. Other content such as Pages (for publishing sites), will not be affected.

Prerequisites for Migrating StoragePoint Content

The option to use Metalogix Content Matrix to migrate StoragePoint data is

available only as the following conditions are met:

· Metalogix Content Matrix detects that Metalogix StoragePoint version 5.1 or higher is installed

on the target.

· The target farm does not use a CSOM Connection Type.

To configure StoragePoint options:

1. If an endpoint profile is configured and you want any documents and attachments to be

migrated to SharePoint, check the Add documents directly to StoragePoint if an endpoint is

configured box.

NOTE: When you check this box, documents and attachments will be added directly through

the StoragePoint API and the end reference will be added in SharePoint. This helps improve

migration efficiency and can potentially help performance speeds when migrating a large

number of documents and/or attachments.

2. If you want the source File Share location to be converted into a Storage Endpoint location on

the target instead of actually copying the files, check the Link Files to SharePoint by configuring

the source directory as a StoragePoint endpoint.

NOTE: When you check this box, the appropriate endpoint location link will be added to the

SharePoint environment. This option's standard use case is for target SharePoint

environments that have StoragePoint installed, but no endpoint has been configured.

Page 130: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

130Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

If both StoragePoint options are selected at the same time, the Link Files to SharePoint by

configuring the source directory as a StoragePoint endpoint option will take priority, and overwrite

the first option. This means that the source File Share will be configured as an endpoint for

StoragePoint, even if another endpoint is already configured. If there is a conflict between

configured endpoints, the documents that experience the conflict will not be migrated.

Transformations Options

If Advanced Mode and Custom Transformers options have been enabled, you can view, create,

and edit Transformers which, as the name implies, "transform" content during migration.

There are several built-in, non-editable transformers that Metalogix Content Matrix uses to

process data during the migration. Advanced users can also create custom transformers using

PowerShell.

The Transformations tab consists of two main sections: Available Definitions and Applied

Transformers For <Object>. The Available Definitions section will list all of the transformation

definitions that are available for the current migration action, in alphabetical order. For example,

the Site definition is available when migrating at the site level or higher. However, if migrating as a

document library or migrating documents, this definition will not be listed.

When one of the Available Definitions items is selected, any transformations that exist/have been

configured within the migrating content will appear. Some of the actions that may be grayed out.

These grayed out items are mandatory transformations that are run during the course of a normal

migration, and these actions cannot be edited or removed. However, they can be reordered by

using the up and down arrows to the right-hand side of the window if you want a transformation

Page 131: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

131Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

action to occur before a mandatory action. Actions that appear and are not grayed are user added

transformations, and can be moved, edited and deleted at the users discretion.

In some cases, you could add another instance of an existing transformer, and then have it run in

two different locations within the migration process. One could be run in the middle, and it could

be run again just before the end.

Using PowerShell to Create CustomTransformations

When you select the Add Transformer > Invoke PowerShell script option for an Available

Definition, you can use custom PowerShell scripts to create your own transformations beyond the

built-in capabilities of the Metalogix Content Matrix.

NOTE: For prerequisites to using PowerShell with Metalogix Content Matrix, see Configuring

PowerShell for Use with Metalogix Content Matrix.

Specify when you want the script to run by selecting one of the following options:

Begin Transformation – The transformation script will run before the migration of the affected

objects, allowing you to read and make changes to objects on the source before objects

themselves migrate.

Transform – The transformation script will run while the migration of the affected object(s) is in

progress. For example, the user mapping between source and target would be run using the

Transform option.

End Transformation – The transformation script will run after the migration of affected object(s),

allowing you to read and make changes to objects on the target.

EXAMPLE: The following Transformer consists of two scripts for disabling and re-enabling the

Required setting for a column list.

· The first script entered into the Begin Transformation tab sets the setting of any columns that

are Required to false before copying begins.

Page 132: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

132Configuring Copying Options

Content Matrix

· The second script, entered into the End Transformations tab, sets the setting back to true after

item migration has completed.

Page 133: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

133Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

Saving or Running a MigrationAction

12

When you finish configuring a migration action, you can run it immediately or save a copy of the

settings to a job file, which displays in the Job List section. You can then:

· run a migration directly from the Jobs List section

OR

· schedule the job to run at a specified time, either as a Windows Scheduled Task or straight

from PowerShell.

OR

· If the Console is configured as the Controller (Host) machine for Distributed Migration, submit

a Distributed Migration job.

You can also save the job configuration as a template so that you can preserve and reuse settings

for future migration jobs.

When the migration starts, a status dialog box will appear. The migration logs can be viewed (in

progress or after the migration is finished) by clicking [Details>>]. The Status section of the status

box will list a live count for the number of successes, warnings, failures, etc. for the migration. The

Progress section of this dialog will list any completions and the type of completion (Sites, lists,

items, users, groups, etc.). A Migration Completed message will appear when finished. Click Close

to exit the status dialog.

Saving a Job Configuration as a Template

You can create job configuration templates for a set of selected settings which can be saved and

reused, including any options that are not normally preserved using the Preserve Configuration

Options option (in the ribbon Settings menu).

These templates can also be moved to another machine and used with a separate install of

Metalogix Content Matrix Console (provided that it is the same Edition of Metalogix Content

Matrix, and the same version number or greater).

Page 134: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

134Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

To save a job configuration template:

1. After initiating a migration, complete the Configure (Object) Copying Options with the settings

that you want to include in the template.

2. Click [Save Job Configuration].

Here you can set the display name for the job template. This is not the actual file name, but it is

the name that Metalogix Content Matrix will use to list the template.

NOTE: In most cases, when a job template is saved by Metalogix Content Matrix it will be saved

to the following location:

<Drive>:\Users\<User>\AppData\Roaming\Metalogix\Metalogix Content Matrix Console -

<Product> Edition

However, it is highly recommended that you do not interact with this system location. If you

are trying to save a job template so it can be exported to another system the template can be

exported from the Manage Job Configurations dialog.

3. Enter the desired display name value and click [OK] to continue.

Once the save is complete, you will be returned to the Configure <Object> Copying Options dialog

where the migration can either be Run or Saved.

The saved job templates will now be visible in the Manage Job Configurations dialog.

NOTE: If you are looking to save a job template and move it to another system for use, this should

be done using the Export option in the Manage Job Configurations window. Additionally, if you

are trying to Import a job template from another system, this must also be done from either the

Manage Job Configurations dialog or it can be imported when applying a template.

Applying a Job Template

Any job templates that have been imported or saved, and are available in the Manage Job

Configurations dialog can be applied to another migration of the same type. For example, if

migrating at the site level, you would not be able to use a job template that is created for a

migration at the list level. It would only be able to use a template that migrates at the site level.

Page 135: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

135Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

The source and target connection types do not apply directly to a job template, so it does not

matter if the connection types for the new migration are the same as the connection types for the

job template. If the connection types are different than any options that are not applicable for the

connection types that are being used will not be available, but all other options will be set.

1. After initiating a migration, click [Open Existing Job Configuration] in the bottom left corner of

the Configure <Object> Copying Options dialog to display the Select Job Configuration to

Apply dialog.

NOTE: Any options you have specified directly in the dialog will be overwritten once a job

template is applied.

The dialog lists all of the job templates that are currently available for the migration type (i.e. a

site, list, item, etc. migration), as well as only the templates for the specific Edition of Metalogix

Content Matrix that is being used.

2. Select the desired job template and click [OK].

You will be prompted to confirm your action before continuing. Remember that if you choose

to apply the template, any other settings that you entered directly in the Configure <Object>

Copying Options will be lost.

The Configure <Object> Copying Options dialog will now reflect all of the template options.Any additional configuration options can be set or modified, and the migration can continue as

normal.

Managing Job Templates

Metalogix Content Matrix Console job templates can be managed in the Manage Job

Configurations dialog. This dialog allows users to Import, Export, Delete, or Filter any job

templates. Below is a breakdown of the available options in the Manage Job Configurations dialog.

Page 136: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

136Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

· Import - This button allows users to Import a job template. The imported job template must be

from the same Edition of Metalogix Content Matrix Console. For example, if users are

importing a template into SharePoint Edition then the template must have been exported from

SharePoint Edition.

· Export - This button allows users to Export a job template. The export will create an XML file in

a desired folder location so the file can be copied and placed into another location as needed.

· Delete - This button will delete any selected job templates from Metalogix Content Matrix

Console. When deleting a template, a confirmation dialog will open and must be confirmed

before the templates are deleted. Deleting will permanently delete the selected templates

from Metalogix Content Matrix Console.

· Filter - This is a text box that allow users to enter a value that Metalogix Content Matrix will

filter the job templates against. The filter will only display items that contain the specified

value. There is a Filter icon to the right-hand side of the filter text box. Clicking this icon will

apply the filter text value to all of the job templates listed in the Manage Job Configurations

dialog, so only the templates that contain/include the matching filter value will be shown.

Filtering can be cleared by removing the text value from the filter text box, and clicking the

filter icon button.

Exporting a Job Template

To export a job template:

1. In Metalogix Content Matrix's ribbon menu, switch to the Settings tab and click [Manage Job

Configurations] button to display the Manage Job Configurations dialog.

2. Select the template you want to export then click the Export button at the top of the Manage

Job Configurations dialog, .

Page 137: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

137Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

3. Navigate to the desired folder location where you want to save the job template, enter a File

name, and click [Save].

4. The job template XML file will be saved to the selected folder location, and Metalogix Content

Matrix will return to the Manage Job Configurations dialog. Any additional importing,

exporting, or deleting of job templates can be done. Click Close to return to the main Metalogix

Content Matrix window.

Now that the job templates have been exported and saved to a folder location they can be

manually moved to another location as required.

Importing a Job Template

Only templates that have been created from the same Edition of Metalogix Content Matrix Console

can be imported. For example, a job template from SharePoint Edition cannot be used in File Share

Edition, it can only be imported into SharePoint Edition.

To import a job template:

1. In Metalogix Content Matrix's ribbon menu, switch to the Settings tab and click [Manage Job

Configurations] button to display the Manage Job Configurations dialog.

2. Click the Import button at the top of the Manage Job Configurations dialog, navigate to the

folder location for the template XML file, then click [Open].

The job template will be added to the list of templates in the Manage Job Configurations

dialog. The template will be listed using the same Display name that was used when the task

was created on the original system, and will not have its file name displayed.

Page 138: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

138Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

The job template is now imported and can be applied to any migration.

Importing and Exporting Migration Jobs

From the Jobs List, you can export a job to an xml file. This functionality allows you to:

· Copy a job from one instance of Metalogix Content Matrix to another (as long they are for the

same Edition).

· Manually modify a job, then re-import it.

To export a job to an xml file:

1. In the Job List, select the job you want to export.

2. Right-click, and choose Export selected job to xml.

The xml file will automatically open in whatever program is set as the default application for

xml files, and it can be saved to any desired location.

To import an xml file to the Job List:

1. Make sure the file you want to import uses a different ID value than any existing Jobs (this

should only be an issue if the XML file was previously exported from the same Metalogix

Content Matrix Console).

NOTE: If the xml file that is being imported contains the same ID value as an already existing

Job, then the import will fail.

2. From the Job List menu, choose File > Import Jobs From Xml.

3. Select the xml file to import.

If the import is successful, the job will be listed in the Job List section. If unsuccessful, an error

message will be given.

Scheduling a Migration Job

Metalogix Content Matrix can run a migration action through the Metalogix Content Matrix

Console or as a Windows Scheduled Task.

Page 139: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

139Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

How the Schedule Task Feature Works

Metalogix Content Matrix Console can run any migration as a scheduled task on the system that

the client application is installed on. This can be any migration action that exists in the Job List

section, whether it's a migration job that was saved or a job that was previously run. Once a job

exists in the Job List section users can run the Schedule Task option.

The Schedule Task option saves configurations for the selected job(s) as a PowerShell script. After

the script has been saved, you must create a Windows Scheduled task:

· through the Metalogix Content Matrix Console UI

OR

· directly in the Windows Task Scheduler

Once these jobs have been created as scheduled tasks they can no longer be viewed (as scheduled

tasks) in Metalogix Content Matrix. If you want to make any other modifications or remove the

task you can do so directly in the Windows Task Scheduler. If a task has been scheduled, the

system will be able to run the task at the appointed time(s), regardless of whether Metalogix

Content Matrix client application is open.

After the scheduled task has run, a new entry will be added into Metalogix Content Matrix's Job

List section.

Before Configuring Migration Actions to Run asScheduled Tasks

· Any system that runs the PowerShell script for the scheduled task must have all of the

Metalogix PowerShell snap-ins and plug-ins installed and configured for use on the PowerShell

console that will run the scripts. If these are not configured the scripts will fail to run, and the

migration will fail.

· It is recommended that the connections to the source and target environments have the

Remember my password check-box selected. This is to ensure that the PowerShell scripts will

be able to establish a connection to both the source and target environments when they are

being run. If a password is required and this check-box is not set, the migration will fail.

However, users can manually enter this value into the PowerShell script itself if the option was

not checked when the script was first generated.

Note: The migration job used to create a scheduled task can either be a job that has previously

been run or it can be a job that was saved.

Page 140: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

140Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

Initiating a Scheduled Task

1. Select the newly added migration job in the Job List section.

2. Use the information in the following table to determine the appropriate action to take.

If you want to create a scheduled task … Then …

Through the Metalogix Content Matrix

Console UI

Either:

§ Click the [Schedule Task] button in the

Job List menu options

OR

§ Right-click and choose Schedule Task.

Directly in the Windows Task Scheduler Either:

§ Click the [Generate PowerShell Script]

button in the Job List menu options

OR

§ Right-click and choose Generate

PowerShell Script.

3. Choose the appropriate option from the sub-menu to specify the security method that will be

used when generating the PowerShell script to run the scheduled task. Use the information in

the following table for guidance.

If you want to generate a PowerShell

script for scheduling …

Choose …

that can be used only by the currently

logged in User Account on the machine it

is generated on

For Current User and Machine.

NOTE: Any PowerShell scripts that are

generated for scheduling through this option

can only be run by the logged in user on the

machine they were generated on.

that can be used by any User account on

the machine it is generated on

For Local Machine.

that can be used by any User account on

any machine that has the certificate that is

specified when the script is created

For Certificate.

When you save the PowerShell script using this

method you will be prompted to select a

security certificate that exist on that machine.

The selected certificate will be required on any

Page 141: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

141Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

If you want to generate a PowerShell

script for scheduling …

Choose …

system that attempts to run the script at a later

date.

4. Use the information in the table below to determine the appropriate action to take based on

the option you chose.

If you chose … Then …

Schedule Task When prompted, save the PowerShell script to a desired

location; by default:

· For scripts generated using the For Current User and

Machine option - <Drive>:

\Users\<Username>\Documents\Metalogix\PowerShell.

· For scripts generated using the For Current Machine or

For Certificate options - <Drive>:

\ProgramData\Metalogix\PowerShell

Generate Powershell Script a Notepad file containing the PowerShell script opens.

Save this file to the location from where you want the script

to run, and give it an appropriate name (being sure to keep

the ".ps1" extension).

Continue with the procedure for Scheduling a Migration Job

via the Windows Task Scheduler.

.

Page 142: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

142Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

Scheduling a Migration Job via the ContentMatrix UI

If you chose the Schedule Task option (that is, to schedule a migration job via the UI), once

PowerShell script has been saved the Create Task Wizard dialog opens, allowing you to start

configuring the scheduling for the migration task.

1. Complete the Create Task Wizard as follows:

a) Enter a desired name for the scheduled task in the Task Name field.

The Description section displays some additional details about migration action, such as

the source and target locations.

Click [Next].

Set the Trigger for the scheduled task. Use the information in the following table for guidance.

Page 143: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

143Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

If you want the scheduled job to run … Select …

at the same time every day Daily.

whenever a specific system event is logged When a specific event is logged.

on specified days during specified months Monthly.

one time only at a specific date/time One Time.

on one or more specified days on the week Weekly.

2. Click [Next].

3. Use the information in the following table to determine the appropriate action to take.

If you selected … Then …

Daily· Select a Start date and time, and

· For Recur every….days, select the interval at which you want the job

to run.

When a specific

event is logged· Select the Log from which you want Metalogix Content Matrix to

search for the event.

· Select the Source program, application, or service from which the

Logs are filed.

· Enter the specific Event ID used trigger the scheduled task.

Page 144: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

144Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

If you selected … Then …

Monthly· Select a Start date and time.

· From the Months drop-down, use the checkboxes to select/deselect

the months during which you want the scheduled task to run.

· Select the appropriate option:

§ If you want the scheduled task to run on specific calendar days,

select the Days radio button, and from the drop-down use the

checkboxes to select/deselect the days when you want the

scheduled task to run.

Page 145: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

145Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

If you selected … Then …

§ If you want the scheduled task to run on specific days of the week,

select the On radio button, and from the drop-downs select the

frequency and week day(s).

For example, if first, third and last are selected in the first drop down

menu, and Monday and Thursday are selected in the second drop

down menu. the scheduled task will be run on the first, third, and last

Monday of the month, as well as the first, third, and last Thursday of

the month.

One Time Select a Start date and time.

Page 146: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

146Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

If you selected … Then …

Weekly· Select a Start date and time.

· For Recur every n weeks on:

§ Specify how often the scheduled task should occur.

For example, if the value is set to 5 then the scheduled task will run on

every fifth week. If the value is set to 2 then the task will be run every

other (every second) week.

§ Check each day of the week on which you want the task to run.

For example, if the Recur every value is set to "3" and the day is set to

"Wednesday", then on every third week the scheduled task will be run

on Wednesday at the entered value for the start time. If the recur

value is set to "1" and both "Wednesday" and "Sunday" have been

selected, then the scheduled task will be run on Sunday and

Wednesday of every week.

Page 147: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

147Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

If you selected … Then …

A Summary of the scheduled task displays. If the summary looks correct, click the Finish button to

complete the scheduling of the migration task. The task will now be added in the Windows Task

Scheduler under a Metalogix folder. (You may need to Refresh the Windows Task Scheduler dialog

before the scheduled tasks will be displayed.)

Viewing the scheduled task, making any modifications or deleting the task itself must be done from

within the Windows Task Scheduler, which can be accessed via the Metalogix Content Matrix

Console’s Jobs List section Scheduled Task >

After a scheduled task has been run, a new entry for the migration will be added into the Job List

section.

Page 148: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

148Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

Scheduling a Migration Job via the WindowsTask Scheduler

If you chose the Generate PowerShell Script option (that is, to configure the migration job directly

in the Windows Task Scheduler) and saved the PowerShell script to the location of your choice,

follow the steps below.

1. On the system where the scheduled task will run, open the Windows Task Scheduler.

2. Choose Actions > Create Task.

3. Enter a task Name and Description.

4. In the General tab, go to Security options and specify the user account that the task should be

run under. Change the settings so the task will run regardless of whether the user is logged in.

5. Select the Triggers tab, and click [New] to add a new trigger for the scheduled task. This new

task should use the On a schedule option. The start date can be set to a desired time, and the

frequency and duration of the task can be set based on your specific needs. Click [OK] when

your desired settings are entered.

6. Select the Actions tab and click [New] to set the action for this task to run. Set the Action to

Start a program.

7. In the Program/script box enter "PowerShell."

8. In the Add arguments (optional) box enter the value ".\[Your PowerShell Script Name]." For

example, if your PowerShell Script is named "Migration1.ps1" then you would enter ".

\Migration1.ps1" as the value.

9. In the Start in (optional) box, add the location of the folder that contains your PowerShell

script.

NOTE: The location used in the Start in box will also be used for storing the scheduled task run

times, the job history for the copies, and any additional logging that may occur.

10. When all the desired settings are made, click [OK].

11. Next, set any other desired settings in the Conditions and Settings tabs. You can also set up

additional actions, such as emailing an Administrator each time the script is run.

12. Once all the desired actions have been made (or added), click [OK].

The task will be immediately set, and is ready to run.

Submitting a Distributed Migration Job

If the Metalogix Content Matrix Console is configured as the Controller (Host) for Distributed

Migration, you can submit a Distributed Migration job.

Page 149: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

149Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

Distributed Migration Job Limitations

·

· Local OM connections to SharePoint are not supported when using Remote

Agents. - A Local OM connection to SharePoint can only be made when

Metalogix Content Matrix is installed on a machine that is running SharePoint

(a SharePoint server or WFE). Since this type of connection can be made on the

Host machine, but cannot be guaranteed to also be available on an Agent

machine, it is not a supported connection adapter for running migrations using

remote Agents.

· Transformer scripts will not work using a Remote Agent if the script is used as an attachment

(i.e. if the script is stored as a file on the local file system, and added to the migration

configuration as an attachment) - When running a migration, uses can go to the

'Transformations' tab in the configuration options and set the migration to use a transformer.

If the transformer is added by using the Invoke PowerShell script > Use Script From File option,

then the transformer will be added by selecting a script file from the file system and attaching

it to the configuration options. Transformer script files that are attached in this manner do not

get transferred to the Agent machines, so when the Agent tries to run the migration it will run

without the configured transformer script.

· If an action in Metalogix Content Matrix is not supported for generating/running the action

over PowerShell, then that action is not supported to run remotely on an Agent machine. -

Not all actions in Metalogix Content Matrix are supported when using PowerShell. Since

running a migration on a remote Agent relies on PowerShell, some actions are not supported

to be run remotely. For example:

§ Copy Site > Paste Site Objects > List E-mail Notification

§ Copy Site > Paste Site Objects > Managed Metadata Local Site Collection Group

§ Copy Site > Paste Site Objects > Managed Metadata Term Store

§ Copy Site > Paste Site Objects > Site column

§ Copy List > Paste List Objects > Permission

Before Submitting a Distributed Migration Job

· Make sure all dependencies exist on the agent machines. For example, if the mappings were

changed, then the Agents must be updated with the new configuration files before performing

a migration. For instructions about updating the configuration files, see Managing Agents

· If the Distributed Migration model is installed across multiple domains, it is recommended that

the connection to the SharePoint site is made with the SharePoint site credentials instead of

using the current Users windows credentials. The Agent will use the same credentials and will

Page 150: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

150Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

then be able to access the SharePoint site. Make sure you save the password when you

establish the SharePoint connection with the user credentials.

· If the SharePoint site requires another user's credentials, the connection to the SharePoint site

will require those credentials in the Metalogix Content Matrix Console connection dialog on

the Controller (Host) machine. The Agent will use the same credentials and will then be able to

access the SharePoint site.

Procedure for Submitting a DistributedMigration Job

To submit a Distributed Migration job:

1. Open Metalogix Content Matrix Console on the Controller (Host), and verify that you are

connected to the Agent Database.

2. Configure and save your migration job on the Controller.

3. From the Job list in the main application window, highlight the row to select the job.

4. From the Job List toolbar, click Run Jobs Remotely to submit the job for Distributed Migration.

Alternatively, right-click the selected row to display the pop-up action menu. Select the Run

selected job remotely option.

Note: You can select multiple rows to submit more than one job at a time.

The Manage Queue dialog opens. You can now monitor your jobs from this dialog.

5. To view logs that are Running or Done, from the Job List toolbar, choose File > Refresh.

Page 151: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

151Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

Managing the Distributed Migration Job Queue

If Metalogix Content Matrix has been configured for Distributed Migration, the Console that is set up

as the Controller (Host), provides a single point of management control over the job queue.

To open the Manage Queue dialog:

From the Metalogix Content Matrix Console ribbon Connection tab, select Manage Queue.

NOTE: If the Manage Queue button appears disabled, your Metalogix Content Matrix Console

edition is not connected to use a configured Agent Database. To configure an agent database, see

Creating/Connecting to an Agent Database for Distributed Migration.

The Manage Queue dialog displays a list of migration Jobs, called the Distributed Migration Job list.

The information presented in the various columns are as follows:

Column Description

Job ID The unique identifier of the job.

Job Name The name of the job.

Created The date and time the job was saved (and not when the job was queued).

Source URL The source of the migration content.

Target URL The target of the migration content.

Agent

Name

The name of the Agent where the job is running. The value is blank when

the job is queued.

Status

Recent state of the job. The status values could be one of the following

values:

· Queued - the migration job is ready to start.

· Running - a migration is in progress.

· Failed - the job has encountered a fault condition.

· Done - the migration has completed.

Page 152: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

152Saving or Running a Migration Action

Content Matrix

You can select a job from the list by clicking anywhere on the row. A row selector icon and the

highlighted row indicates the selected row.

Deleting a Distributed Migration Job

1. From the Manage Queue dialog, select the job that you want to delete from the Distributed

Migration Job list. The row selector icon and the highlighted row indicates the selected row.

NOTE: Only jobs with a status of Queued or Done can be deleted. Deleting a job from the

queue will not remove or delete any of the logging information that has already been sent to

the main Job list for the Agent Database.

2. Click Delete Job.

(If the button is disabled, check that the selected job has a status that is either Queued or Done.)

A dialog will display asking you to confirm the deletion.

Refreshing the Jobs List

NOTE: The refresh is applied to whichever job list Metalogix Content Matrix is currently

connected to, whether that is the Agent Database (for the Distributed Migration feature) or via a

standard connection.

To refresh the jobs list:

1. From the Manage Queue dialog, select a job in the Job List. The row selector icon and the

highlighted row indicates the selected row.

2. From the Jobs List menu bar, choose File > Refresh.

If the status of the job has changed, the Status value will indicate the new status of the job.

Page 153: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

153Log Files

Content Matrix

Log Files

13

You can view the progress of a migration tab in real-time via interactive log files. The logs are fully

searchable, and are based on SQL Compact Edition (SQL CE) file types. The log files are tied into Job

files (.LST), and these files are limited to 4GB in size.

To view an interactive log:

After starting an action, click Details>> in the progress dialog box.

NOTE: All logging in Metalogix Content Matrix is done through jobs. If a job list is deleted from

the Jobs List, all logging for those actions will also be deleted. There is no backup for the job lists,

unless the job is manually saved to another location. Once a job list is deleted, all logging for the

actions within that job list are gone. Metalogix Content Matrix will automatically hold any job lists

created through any copy or compare actions, in the Job Lists section, and these job lists can only

be deleted through the appropriate Delete commands. The job lists can also be manually selected

and saved through the Job list section.

There are two types of jobs in Metalogix Content Matrix:

A job list is a collection of job items. A Job list is created for each copy or compare action that is

made. Any "Copy" action/job that is in the Job List section can be used as the base of an

incremental copy job. Job items can be viewed in the Log Viewer, by opening a job list. There are

three basic ways to open a job list to access the Log Viewer:

· Double-click on a job list.

· Select a job list, then in the Job List section of the toolbar click View Log.

· Select a job, right-click, and choose View log.

Job items are job files, or logging, for individual items within the scope of an action. For example, if

a File Share folder is copied as a SharePoint site, there would be a job item for adding each

SharePoint list and each item in that list, and one job item for adding or creating each site or sub-

site. If a File Share folder with 5 documents is copied, then there would be a job item for

adding/creating the list, and then one job item for adding each of the documents.

Page 154: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

154Log Files

Content Matrix

Job items are job files, or logging, for individual items within the scope of an action. For example, if

a SharePoint site is copied, there would be a job item for adding each list and each item in that list,

and one job item for adding or creating each site or sub-site. If a SharePoint list with fie documents

is copied, then there would be a job item for adding/creating the list, and then one job item for

adding each of the documents.

From the Log Viewer you can select and view any job items that exists within that job list.

NOTE: Some actions in Metalogix Content Matrix have the ability to run with Verbose Logging.

This option will increase the size of the log file.

Log Item Details

To view Log Item Details:

1. From the Log Viewer, select the item whose details you want to view.

2. Use one of the following options:

§ Double-click on the item.

OR

§ Right-click and choose View Job Item.

OR

§ If the job is currently running, click Details>>.

Page 155: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

155Log Files

Content Matrix

The Job Details dialog contains the following information:

· Operation - The last operation performed on the item.

· Status – The status of the item. If a compare action is being performed then this could be:

completed, different, or missing.

· Item Name - For items, the Item ID. For documents, the Filename.

· Time Started – The time the action for the item was started.

· Time Finished – The time the action for the item was finished.

· Bytes Copied – The bytes (B) that were copied in the action. This will be displayed in KB in

some cases.

· Source - The Source URL for the item.

· Target - Target URL for the item.

· Information - Provides an informational message about the item, such as. This section will

provide a description for any different and/or missing attributes/metadata for an item.

· Details View - Any errors that were encountered with the item when an action was performed.

· Content Comparer tab - Any differences between Source and Target content (from a compare

action). You can display this information in either a Grid View, which displays a metadata

property grid for the item, or as a Text View, which displays a XML text format of the item.

This option is most useful if Verbose Logging has been checked

Page 156: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

156Log Files

Content Matrix

You can also:

· Use [Copy] to copy all of the item information and details (including the Details tab) into the

system’s clipboard. You can then paste the information when it can then be pasted to another

location. When pasted the information will look similar to that of the actual Log Item Details

dialog. This can be used for easy copy/pasting of an items migration log details.

· Use [Prev] and [Next] buttons to move to the previous or next item on the list (if applicable).

Exporting Jobs to an Excel File

You can export a selected job or multiple jobs from the Job List section into a Microsoft Excel file.

The export will include all of the operations within each job (whether it is a migration action or

some other action), and their details. This is to help users better understand their migration data

and results, and provides another way to review the resulting logs.

In addition to the log details that are provided, there are also a number of tables and charts that

can be accessed in different tabs within the Excel file. These tables and charts will help breakdown

the information in a more visible manner.

To export one or more jobs to an Excel file:

1. In the Jobs List, select the job(s) you want to export.

2. Use one of the following options:

§ From the Jobs List menu, select Export Excel

OR

§ Right-click and choose Export selected job to Excel.

3. Save the file to the desired location.

By default the Excel file will open after it has been created. This process may take a few minutes

depending on the size of the selected job(s) and the number of actions in the log(s).

Procedure for exporting one or more jobs to anExcel file

1.

Page 157: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

157Log Files

Content Matrix

Information in Exported Excel Files

When an Excel file is exported from the Metalogix Content Matrix Job List there are a number of

page tabs that can be viewed. Each page tab will display a different set of data, and some of these

tabs will also display pivot graphs (with pivot tables behind them).

NOTE: The data within all of these Excel tabs (both the tables and the graphs) should only be

considered a starting point when looking at your migration data. You can modify the existing

graphs through various methods, such as applying filters, changing the data values, etc. You can

also take the "raw" data from the LogItems tab and use it to create your own graphs or sets of

data as required.

The exported file contains the following tabs:

· Jobs - All of the specific jobs that are included in the export. This includes migration jobs as

well as other actions.

· LogItems - All of the operations that have been run by Metalogix Content Matrix and provide

all of the logging details that are available in the Log Viewer and Log Item Details windows.

Some examples of these operations are: adding lists, adding content types, copying

documents, adding users, updating lists, etc.

· Error Rates - A a graph that represents the number of errors and warnings that Metalogix

Content Matrix encounters during a migration on a "per minute" basis. The vertical axis will list

the number of errors/warnings that are encountered (at the specified time), and the horizontal

axis lists the amount of time (displayed in a "per minute" value). The horizontal axis can also

Page 158: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

158Log Files

Content Matrix

be changed to display in month, day, or hour time values as well. Below the graph is a table

that provides a different view of the same error/warning breakdown.

· Operation Counts - The number of operations/actions that are run over a period of time. Some

examples are: copying sites, copying lists, copying documents, adding SharePoint groups,

adding users, copying permissions, etc., and each operation has its own line representation on

the graph. The vertical axis lists the number of operations that are running (at the specified

time), and the horizontal axis lists the amount of time (this is displayed in a "per minute"

value). The horizontal axis can also be changed to display in month, day, or hour time values as

well. Below the graph there is a table that provides a different view of the same migration

operation data.

Page 159: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

159Log Files

Content Matrix

· Operation Duration - The total duration of time for each operation/action type against the

total migration time. This is potentially the most confusing graph to read in the exported Excel

file. The vertical axis lists the total duration time for each action. This is determined by finding

the difference between each operation/actions Time Started and Time Finished values, and

then adding the totals together for all of that operation/actions of that type that are running.

This is then displayed against the horizontal axis which lists the time (displayed in a "per

minute" value) for the migration. The horizontal axis can also be changed to display in month,

day, or hour time values as well. Below the graph there is a table that will provide a different

view of the same migration data.

An example of how to read this graph is: if at minute 25 (of the hour, not the 25 minute of the

migration) a large number of small documents are copied and completed (all in the 25th

minute), then at minute 25 in the graph there will likely be a spike in the "duration time" for the

"Copying Document" operation/action. If each document was copied in 2 seconds, and there

were 41 small documents, then the Sum of Duration value would be listed as 82 seconds (or

0:01:22). So the results in the graph would show a spike for the Copying Document

operation/action and minute 25, with a value of 0:01:22.

· Operation Throughput – The amount of data/throughput (in MB) that is migrated on a "per

minute" basis. The vertical axis lists the amount of data that is being pushed through Metalogix

Content Matrix for a given operation (at the specified time), and the horizontal axis lists the

time (displayed in a "per minute" value) at which that the action was performed. The

horizontal axis can also be changed to display in month, day, or hour time values. Below the

graph there is a table that will provide a different view of the same throughput data.

Page 160: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

160Log Files

Content Matrix

Copying Job Logging to Other Applications

It is possible to copy the results of migration jobs from log files to other applications. This can be

beneficial if you want to keep track of copy or incremental information outside of Metalogix

Content Matrix, or want to manipulate the information for reporting or retention purposes. The

log information is copied as text, to the clipboard, and can then be pasted within any other

application that allows text pasting. For example, if a copy action was made, the logging can be

copied into a Word file, or into an Excel spreadsheet, then saved.

NOTE: Only the end results of the total action will be copied.

To copy the logging for a job list:

1. Select a job from the Job List.

2. Right-click, and choose Copy selected job to clipboard (alternately Ctrl+C can be used).

3. Open the desired target program (for example: Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, Notepad, etc),

then paste the content into the application (Ctrl+V, or the paste command in the application

itself).

NOTE: The logging for each action within the list must be copied separately.

To copy the logging for job items:

· Select the desired job list or job item(s) that the logging is to be copied from, and open the job

list to access the Log Viewer.

Page 161: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

161Log Files

Content Matrix

· Select any job items that are to be copied. Single or multiple items can be selected in the Log

Viewer. In order to copy the logging for the entire job, all job items in the Log Viewer must be

selected.

· When all of the desired items are selected, right-click on one of them, and select Copy Log

Items to Clipboard, and select to either copy them with, or without details. The Details are a set

of extra columns that are added to the logging. These columns are typically: Details,

SourceContent, and TargetContent. These columns do not always contain extra information.

The default copy option (Ctrl+C) is to copy the logging without the Details.

Creating a Support Zip File

You can generate a zip file of data associated with a single job item to help Quest Support facilitate

troubleshooting.

The high-level data collected in the zip file includes:

· Application Settings files.

· Product information (product version, license, etc.).

· Information about the job item (what action settings were set, the job log, etc.).

IMPORTANT: Please review the contents of the zip file before sending it to Support. While this

feature attempts to only collect non-sensitive data, no guarantees can be made - it is up to you to

ensure that any files in the zip folder are stripped of any confidential data. Regardless, Quest

assures that the contents of the zip file will only be used for troubleshooting the associated

support ticket.

Page 162: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

162Log Files

Content Matrix

To create a support zip file::

1. In the Job List, select the job for which the zip file is to be generated.

2. Use one of the following options:

§ In the main ribbon, click the Help tab, then Create Support Zip File.

§ Right-click and choose Create Support Zip File.

3. Save the file to the desired location using the desired file name.

4. If you wish to review the zip file for sensitive information, click Yes to open the zip file. Once

you are satisfied with the contents of the zip file, it can be sent to Quest Support to aid in

troubleshooting.

Page 163: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

163Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

Using PowerShell with ContentMatrix

14

Metalogix Content Matrix can generate PowerShell scripts to be used to migrate SharePoint

content through the PowerShell command window. Anything that can be done through the

Metalogix Content Matrix Console User Interface (UI) can also be done though PowerShell, adding

PowerShell capability to content migration.

PowerShell console shortcuts are added to the same Start Menu folder location where shortcuts to

Metalogix Content Matrix consoles are placed after installation.

NOTE: If this option is not used to open PowerShell, see Configuring PowerShell for Use with

Metalogix Content Matrix, to set up and configure the Metalogix PowerShell plug-ins and snap-

ins.

Page 164: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

164Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

Configuring PowerShell for Use with ContentMatrix

Metalogix Content Matrix can run PowerShell commands after some initial PowerShell

configuration. The following steps need to be performed one time only.

To run PowerShell commands with Metalogix Content Matrix:

1. Change the working directory of PowerShell to the installation directory of that Metalogix

Content Matrix edition.

2. Register the Metalogix.SharePoint.Commands DLL.

3. Register the Metalogix.System.Commands DLL.

4. Register the Metalogix.File.Commands DLL.

5. Register the Metalogix.Jobs.Reporting.Commands DLL.

6. Add the PowerShell snap-ins for the Metalogix Application Framework. This step must be done

each time you open and use PowerShell with Metalogix Content Matrix.

Registering the Metalogix Command DLL Files

1. Open a PowerShell command window.

NOTE: While 64-bit systems normally open 64-bit versions of PowerShell, they can also run 32-

bit PowerShell by going to Start > All Programs > Accessories > Windows PowerShell and

selecting Windows PowerShell (x86).

2. In the PowerShell command window, change the working directory to the installation folder for

Metalogix Content Matrix. If the default installation location is used for installing Metalogix

Content Matrix, then this command should be:

· For 64-bit systems: CD "C:\Program Files (x86)\Metalogix\MetalogixContent Matrix Consoles\File Share Edition"

· For 32-bit systems: CD "C:\Program Files (x86)\Metalogix\MetalogixContent Matrix Consoles\File Share Edition"

3. After the directory has been changed to the installation folder in the PowerShell command

window, enter:

Page 165: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

165Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· For 64-bit systems: C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework64\v4.0.30319\installutil.exeMetalogix.SharePoint.Commands.dll

· For 32-bit systems: C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v4.0.30319\installutil.exeMetalogix.SharePoint.Commands.dll

4. Wait for the command to run. You should see "The transacted install has completed" when the

install has been completed. Enter the command:

· For 64-bit systems: C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework64\v4.0.30319\installutil.exeMetalogix.System.Commands.dll

· For 32-bit systems: C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v4.0.30319\installutil.exeMetalogix.System.Commands.dll

5. Wait for the command to run. You should see "The transacted install has completed" when the

install has been completed. Then, enter the command:

· For 64-bit systems: C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework64\v4.0.30319\installutil.exeMetalogix.File.Commands.dll

· For 32-bit systems: C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v4.0.30319\installutil.exeMetalogix.File.Commands.dll

6. Wait for the command to run. You should see "The transacted install has completed" when the

install has been completed. Enter the command:

· For 64-bit systems: C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework64\v4.0.30319\installutil.exeMetalogix.Jobs.Reporting.Commands.dll

· For 32-bit systems: C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v4.0.30319\installutil.exeMetalogix.Jobs.Reporting.Commands.dll

Wait for the command to run. All four DLL files have now been registered in PowerShell. Continue

the installation process by adding the Metalogix Application Framework snap-ins. Registering each

of the DLL files only needs to be done once in PowerShell.

Page 166: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

166Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

Adding the PowerShell Snap-Ins for theMetalogix Application Framework

After the Metalogix DLLs are registered in PowerShell, you can add the snap-ins. These three snap-

ins must be run each time PowerShell is open. It is possible to set up your PowerShell profile so

that it automatically adds these snap-ins each time you open PowerShell.

To add PowerShell snap-ins:

1. Make sure that PowerShell is opened and set to the Metalogix Content Matrix application

directory

2. Enter the following command to load the first snap-in: Add-PSSnapin

Metalogix.SharePoint.Commands.

3. To add the second snap-in enter the command: Add-PSSnapin Metalogix.System.Commands.

4. To add the third snap-in enter the command: Add-PSSnapin .

1. Once the Metalogix snap-ins are added they should appear in the list of PowerShell snap-

ins. You can view the list of snap-ins by entering Get-PSSnapin. The Metalogix snap-ins

should be listed under Metalogix.SharePoint.Commands and Metalogix.System.Commands.

PowerShell is now configured to run with Metalogix Content Matrix.

NOTE: When Metalogix Content Matrix is installed it will automatically try to install all of the

DLL files, and will also add a PowerShell console. If this PowerShell console is used all of the

snap-ins will automatically be added, and ready for use.

A Notepad file will open containing the PowerShell script for any selected job(s). This file can

now be saved as a PowerShell script file.

5. Choose File > Save As... and select any desired save location for the PowerShell script. Give the

file any name you want, but change the file type to .PS1.

Page 167: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

167Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

The PowerShell (PS) script itself contains five sections. They are:

§ Section 1 - This first section at the top (starting with an "if" statement) runs a check in the

PowerShell console to make sure that the Metalogix snap-pins have been added. If they are

not found then it will add them to that instance of the PS console.

§ Load Configuration settings - This section will find and load all of the Metalogix Content

Matrix client application configuration settings into the PowerShell script. These are the

client application's environmental settings and not the migration/action settings.

§ Load source - This section will load all of the data for the source environment connection.

§ Load target - Similar to the previous section, this will load target environment's connection

information.

§ Run the action - Last is the "Run the action" section. This last section will contain all of the

other data for the migration, such as the type of migration (i.e. a site migration, list

migration, item migration, etc.) and all of the settings and configurations for the

migration/action that is being run. This includes things like settings for versions, content

types, permissions, etc.

To run the PowerShell script:

1. On your desktop open the Metalogix Content Matrix Console - SharePoint Edition PowerShell

Console shortcut, for the PowerShell window with the Metalogix plug-ins and snap-ins already

installed.

Page 168: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

168Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

2. In the PowerShell window you can set yourself to act from any desired directory. In some cases

users will set themselves to the same directory that contains their PowerShell scripts. Now

enter the name and extension of the PowerShell Script (at its specified location), and the script

will run.

In the case that you are running a script from the same directory you would use the format: .

\[ScriptName].ps1. So if your PowerShell scrip was named "ResourceScript.ps1" then you

would enter: .\ResourceScript.ps1 into the window, and the script would run.

If the script is in a different directory, you would enter the location of that directory relative to

your current location, followed by the script name. For example, if your prompt is at the "C:\"

drive and your PowerShell script, named "ResourceScript.ps1" is on the desktop you would

enter: C:\Users\[User]\Desktop\ResourceScript.ps1, and the script would run.

NOTE: In some cases the Execution Policy may prevent you from executing a PowerShell script. In

this case you will likely see the message: [Script].ps1 cannot be loaded because the execution of

scripts is disabled on this system. Please see "get-help about_signing" for more details. In this

case, running the command: set-executionpolicy RemoteSigned should change the existing script

policy to allow you to run these scripts for your location. It is advised that you check with your

System Administrators before doing this to ensure that no Company Policies are being broken by

this action. If this is an action you need to take, you should only need to run this command once.

The migration will begin, and any warnings and/or errors that are encountered in running the

script will be displayed in the PowerShell window.

Page 169: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

169Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

Content Matrix PowerShell Commandlet List

Metalogix Content Matrix can generate PowerShell script for you, for any migration action that is

available through it. The below cmdlets are used in the generated PowerShell script, but can also

be used to write your own script, should you desire to do so. For more information on each

cmdlet, simply type get-help [cmdlet]. For example, if you want more information on Copy-

MLSharePointList cmdlet you would enter get-help Copy-MLSharePointList, followed by the Enter

(return) key.

Below is a list of the available cmdlets (and their parameters), broken up into the available

commands for each snap-in.

Metalogix.Jobs.Reporting.Commands

Export-JobHistory

· SqlCeDbFilePath - Specify the path to the SQLCE database file that contains the Job History data.

(Mandatory)

· ServerName - The name of the SQL Server. (Mandatory)

· DatabaseName - The name of the Job History database. (Mandatory)

· AuthType - Indicates whether to use Integrated (Windows) or SQL Authentication. If not

specified will Integrated Authentication will be used.

· Username - Specify the username for SQL Authentication.

· Password - Specify the password for SQL Authentication.

Page 170: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

170Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

Metalogix.SharePoint.Commands

Add-MLSharePointSiteCollection

· WebApplicationName - Name of the Web Application to Create the Site Collection in. Web

Application must exist in the specified Target. (Mandatory)

· WebTemplateName - Web (Site) Template to use for the Site Collection. Web (Site) Template

must exist. The value must be in the form name#configuration. E.g., STS#1 for Blank Site

(Mandatory)

· Language - Language to use for the Site Collection. Can be Language Code (LCID) or Language

Name. Language must exist in the specified Target. (Mandatory)

· ExperienceVersion - The experience version to use when creating the site. This setting is only

used for SharePoint 2013. Use 15 for the 2013 UI and 14 for the 2010 UI.

· Title - The Title for the Site Collection. (Mandatory)

· Description - Description for the Site Collection.

· Path - Managed Path for the Site Collection. Include forward-slash characters where required.

E.g., "/sites/" or "/sites/". (Mandatory)

· URL - Server Relative portion of URL solely used to identify the Site Collection itself. E.g.,

"TestSiteCollection" (Mandatory)

·

· OwnerLogin - Domain and username to be used as the Primary Administrator for the Site

Collection. E.g., "sampledomain\sample.user" (Mandatory)

· SecondaryOwnerLogin - Domain and username to be used as the Secondary Administrator for

the Site Collection. E.g., "sampledomain\another.user"

· ContentDatabaseName - Content Database Name to use. Not specifying this value will use the

default content database (auto detect).

· SelfServiceCreateMode - Allow users without Farm Administrator privileges to add the Site

Collection.

· SetSiteQuota - Set Quota for the Site Collection.

Page 171: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

171Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· QuotaMaximum - Limit site storage to maximum size (Mb). SetSiteQuota must be set to true and

SelfServiceCreateMode should be false. Mutually exclusive with QuotaID.

· QuotaWarning - Send a warning email when the site storage reaches this size (Mb). SetSiteQuota

must be set to true and SelfServiceCreateMode should be false. Mutually exclusive with

QuotaID.

· QuotaID - Use Quota Template. Can be the integer ID or the string name of the Quota.

SetSiteQuota must be set to true and SelfServiceCreateMode should be false.

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

Page 172: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

172Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Add-Permissions

· Name - The name of the user or group you wish to assign a permission level to. (Mandatory)

· PermissionLevel - The name of the permission level you want to grant the specified user or

group. (Mandatory)

· Recurse - A flag that indicates the given permissions level should be granted to the given user for

each item below the target which has unique permissions.

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

Page 173: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

173Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Add-SharePointFolder

· Name - The name of the folder to be created. (Mandatory)

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

Page 174: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

174Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Add-SharePointList

· Name - The name for the new list. (Mandatory)

· TemplateName - The numeric code of the template to use. (Mandatory)

· Description - A description of the list.

· Title - The title for the new list.

· IsOnQuickLaunch - Indicates if the list should be added to the quick launch.

· HasVersions - Indicates if the list should enable major versions.

· HasMinorVersions - Indicates if the list should enable minor versions.

· RequiresContentApproval - Indicates if the list should require content approval.

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

Page 175: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

175Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Add-SharePointSite

· URL - The URL name for the new site. If not specified, it will be automatically generated from the

given name.

· Name - The name for the new site. (Mandatory)

· TemplateName - The name of the template to use, either in [Name]#[Config] form or by the

name of the STP file. (Mandatory)

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

Page 176: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

176Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Page 177: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

177Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

Clear-GlobalMappings

· ClearGuidMappings - Indicates that global GUID mappings should be cleared.

· ClearUrlMappings - Indicates that global URL mappings should be cleared.

· ClearUserMappings - Indicates that global user mappings should be cleared.

· ClearDomainMappingss - Indicates that global domain mappings should be cleared.

Compare-MLSharePointFolder

· CompareFolders - Indicates whether or not to compare folders.

· CompareItems - Indicates whether or not to compare items.

· CompareVersions - Indicates whether or not to compare item versions.

· CompareMetadata - Indicates whether or not to compare object metadata.

· VerboseLog - Indicates whether or not to compare object metadata.

· HaltIfDifferent - Indicates whether or not to halt the comparison if a difference is encountered.

· FilterListsAndFolders - Indicates whether or not to filter lists and folders.

· ListAndFolderFilterExpression - The filter expression applied to lists and folders.

· FilterItemsAndVersions - Indicates whether or not to filter list items and their versions.

· ItemAndVersionFilterExpression - The filter expression applied to list items and versions.

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

Page 178: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

178Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Compare-MLSharePointList

This is the same as Compare-MLSharePointFolder with additional parameters.

Compare-MLSharePointSite

This is the same as Compare-MLSharePointList with additional parameters:

· CompareLists - Indicates whether or not to compare lists.

· CompareSubSites - Indicates whether or not to compare sub sites.

· FilterSubSites - Indicates whether or not to filter sub sites.

Page 179: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

179Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· SubSiteFilterExpression - The filter expression applied to sub sites.

Get-MLSharePointDatabase

· Server - The name of the database server. (Mandatory)

· Database - The name of the SharePoint content database. (Mandatory)

· User - A user to connect as, in DOMAIN\Login format.

· Password - The password for the user provided.

Get-MLSharePointFolder

This is the same as Get-MLSharePointList with an additional parameter:

· FolderPath - The list-relative path to the desired folder, seperated by "/". (Mandatory)

Get-MLSharePointFolderFromDatabase

This is the same as Get-MLSharePointListFromDatabase with an additional parameter:

· FolderPath - The list-relative path to the desired folder, separated by "/". (Mandatory)

Get-MLSharePointItembyFileName

· FileName - The filename of the SharePoint document. (Mandatory)

· FolderPath - The list-relative path to the desired folder, separated by "/".

· ListName - The name of the desired list. (Mandatory)

· SiteURL - The URL of the SharePoint site to connect to. (Mandatory)

· User - A user to connect as, in DOMAIN\Login format.

· Password - The password for the user provided.

· AdapterType - The short name of the adapter type you want to use for the connection. Use OM

for a local SharePoint, WS for a remote SharePoint where our extension service is installed, or

NWS to use the native SharePoint web services.

Page 180: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

180Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· ReadOnly - Indicates that the connection made to the SharePoint site should be read only.

Get-MLSharePointItembyID

· Id - The ID of the SharePoint item. (Mandatory)

· FolderPath - The list-relative path to the desired folder, separated by "/".

· ListName - The name of the desired list. (Mandatory)

· SiteURL - The URL of the SharePoint site to connect to. (Mandatory)

· User - A user to connect as, in DOMAIN\Login format.

· Password - The password for the user provided.

· AdapterType - The short name of the adapter type you want to use for the connection. Use OM

for a local SharePoint, WS for a remote SharePoint where our extension service is installed, or

NWS to use the native SharePoint web services.

· ReadOnly - Indicates that the connection made to the SharePoint site should be read only.

Get-MLSharePointItemFromDatabase

This is the same as Get-MLSharePointListFromDatabase with additional parameters:

· FolderPath - The list-relative path to the desired folder, separated by "/".

· ItemName - The filename or ID of the desired item. (Mandatory)

Get-MLSharePointList

This is the same as Get-MLSharePointSite with an additional parameter:

· ListName - The name of the desired list. (Mandatory)

Page 181: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

181Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

Get-MLSharePointListFromDatabase

This is the same as Get-MLSharePointSiteFromDatabase with an additional parameter:

· ListName - The name of the desired list. (Mandatory)

Get-MLSharePointServer

· ServerURL - The URL of the SharePoint server to connect to. (Mandatory)

· User - A user to connect as, in DOMAIN\Login format.

· Password - The password for the user provided.

· ReadOnly - Indicates that the connection made to the SharePoint site should be read only.

Get-MLSharePointSite

· SiteURL - The URL of the SharePoint site to connect to. (Mandatory)

· User - A user to connect as, in DOMAIN\Login format.

· Password - The password for the user provided.

· AdapterType - The short name of the adapter type you want to use for the connection. Use

OM for a local SharePoint, WS for a remote SharePoint where our extension service is installed,

or NWS to use the native SharePoint web services.

· ReadOnly - Indicates that the connection made to the SharePoint site should be read only.

Get-MLSharePointTenant

· TenantURL - The URL of the SharePoint tenant to connect to. (Mandatory)

· User - A user to connect as, in [email protected] format. (Mandatory)

· Password - The password for the user provided. (Mandatory)

· ReadOnly - Indicates that the connection made to the SharePoint tenant should be read-only.

· AzureAdGraphAppClientId - The Azure AD Graph Application Client ID.

· AzureAdGraphAppSecret - The Azure AD Graph Application Secret.

Page 182: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

182Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

Get-SharePointSiteFromDatabase

· Server - The name of the database server. (Mandatory)

· Database - The name of the SharePoint content database. (Mandatory)

· SiteURL - The server-relative URL of the SharePoint site to connect to.

· User - A user to connect as, in DOMAIN\Login format.

· Password - The password for the user provided.

· HostHeader - A host header for a specified subsite. Use this if you are connecting to a site or

subsite with a host header name.

Refresh-SharePointNode

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

Page 183: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

183Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Remove-MLSharePointFolder

· Folder - The Folder object retrieved by using the Get-MLSharePointFolder Cmdlet. (Mandatory)

·

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

Page 184: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

184Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Remove-MLSharePointItem

· Item - The ListItem object retrieved by using the Get-MLSharePointItem Cmdlet. (Mandatory)

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

Page 185: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

185Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Remove-MLSharePointList

· List - The list object retrieved by using the Get-MLSharePointList Cmdlet. (Mandatory)

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

Page 186: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

186Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Remove-MLSharePointSite

· Site - The site object retrieved by using the Get-MLSharePointSite Cmdlet. (Mandatory)

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

Page 187: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

187Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Remove-MLSharePointSiteCollection

· SiteCollection - The Site Collection object retrieved by using the Get-MLSharePointSite Cmdlet.

(Mandatory)

· Server - The parent Server object of the Site Collection, retrieve by using the Get-

MLSharePointServer Cmdlet. (Mandatory)

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

Page 188: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

188Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Search-SharePointSite

· SearchTerm - The search term to use.

· MaxResults - The number of search results to output.

· MatchExactly - Indicates that the search term must match one of the searched fields exactly.

· Recursive - Indicates that data within all subwebs should be included in the search.

· IncludeItems - Indicates that the search results should include items.

Page 189: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

189Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· IncludeDocuments - Indicates that the search results should include documents.

· IncludeFolders - Indicates that the search results should include folders.

· IncludeLists - Indicates that the search results should include lists.

· IncludeSites - Indicates that the search results should include sites.

· ContentType - If specified, search results must include this value in their content type name.

· Author - If specified, search results must have been created by an author matching this value.

· Editor - If specified, search results must have been modified by an editor matching this value.

· CreatedBefore - If specified, search results must have been created before this date.

· CreatedAfter - If specified, search results must have been created after this date.

· ModifiedBefore - If specified, search results must have been modified before this date.

· ModifiedAfter - If specified, search results must have been modified after this date.

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set, default

credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email server. If no

user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job completion

email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job completion

email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if the passed-in

value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered mandatory, they will be added

automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection string is invalid,

an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are specified, then the 'JobDatabase'

parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written to the job database.

Page 190: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

190Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

Update-SharePointSiteCollectionSettings

· SiteCollectionAdmins - A list of login names to be granted site collection administrator privileges.

· QuotaMaximum - An independently defined maximum storage size for this site collection.

· QuotaWarning - An independently defined size at which to send a warning email for this site

collection.

· QuotaID - A quota template ID to use for this site collection.

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

Page 191: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

191Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Metalogix.System.Commands

Set-ApplicationDataPath

· Path - The path to be used as the root folder for the application path. Note that relative path

elements relating to the product being used will still be generated within this directory, and that

the application data will be contained within those folders. (Mandatory)

· IncludeCompanyName - Indicates that the Metalogix company name should still be used as part

of the relative path from the specified directory to the application data folder.

Set-CommonDataPath

· Path - The path to be used as the root folder for the common data path. Note that relative path

elements relating to the product being used will still be generated within this directory, and that

the common data will be contained within those folders. (Mandatory)

· IncludeCompanyName - Indicates that the Metalogix company name should still be used as part

of the relative path from the specified directory to the common data folder.

Get-MetalogixConfigurationVariable

· Name - The name of the configuration variable. (Mandatory)

· ValueType - Specify the value type of the configuration variable. This type must be IConvertible.

(Default: IConvertible).

Page 192: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

192Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

New-Filter

· PropertyName - The name of the parameter to compare the value to on the object being

filtered. (Mandatory)

· Operand - The operand to use to compare the specified value to the given property value.

(Mandatory)

· Value - The value to compare the given property to. (Mandatory)

· CaseSensitive - Indicates if the comparison should be case-sensitive. This parameter is only

meaningful when the property to be compared to is a string.

· TypeName - The name of a type to apply the filter to. If not specified, the filter will apply to any

object.

Join-Filter

· Logic - The logic to use in the join (and or or). (Mandatory)

· FilterExpression - The filter object to join together. Can be a set of filters). (Mandatory)

Invoke-Filter

· Objects (Mandatory)

· Filter (Mandatory)

Load-MetalogixConfigurationVariableSettings

· FilePath - The full file path of the configuration variable settings file to load. (Mandatory)

· Scope - The scope to load these settings into. (Default: Environment).

Page 193: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

193Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

New-MetalogixSerializableObject

· TypeName - The name of the type of object to create. (Mandatory)

· AssemblyName - The name of the assembly containing the type to be created. (Mandatory)

· SerializedValue - The XML representation of a single serializable Metalogix object. (Mandatory)

· Enumerate - If set, any collections returned by the cmdlet will enumerated. Otherwise,

collections will be returned as a single object.

New-MetalogixSerializableObjectCollection

· SerializedValue - The XML representation of a Metalogix object collection. Generally this will be

obtained by requesting the PowerShell command for a job configured in the GUI. This cmdlet is

not recommended for general use. (Mandatory)

Set-MetalogixConfigurationVariable

· Scope - The scope of the configuration variable. Possible values are Environment,

EnvironmentSpecific, User, UserSpecific, Application, ApplicationSpecific,

ApplicationAndUserSpecific. (Default: ApplicationAndUserSpecific). (Mandatory)

· Name - The name of the configuration variable. (Mandatory)

· Value - The value of the configuration variable. (Mandatory)

Set-MetalogixDefaultResolverSetting

· Name - The name of the configuration variable ("ResourceTableResourceTableLink").

(Mandatory)

· Value - The value of the configuration variable. This value will indicate where to obtain

configuration key settings from. Options are local file system

("Metalogix.ResourceFileTableResolver") or agent database

(Metalogix.Core.ConfigVariables.ResourceDatabaseTableResolver). (Mandatory)

Page 194: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

194Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

Metalogix.File.Commands

Copy-File

· IncludeFiles - Specify whether to include files. (Disabled)

· ExistingFileAction - Overwrite, rename, or skip on existing file with same name.

· DefaultContentType - Specify to migrate current content using the default target content type.

· ContentTypeID - Specify the content type id of the content type to map to.

· ContentTypeFieldMappings - Specify field mappings from source fields to the target content

type.

· CorrectName - Enable/disable automatic replacement of invalid SharePoint characters in name.

· CorrectNameCharacter - Specify the replacement character for invalid SharePoint characters in

name.

· RenameFiles - Enable/disable renaming of filenames using custom column.

· RenameColumn - Specify the column name of the column to use for renaming the files.

· LinkCorrectionOptions - Specify the link correction options.

· LoggingOptions - Specify the logging options.

· PermissionsOptions - Specify the permissions options.

· TargetHierarchyOptions - Specify the target hierarchy options.

· StoragePointOptions - Specify the target StoragePoint options.

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

Page 195: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

195Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Copy-FileAsHierarchy

· MigrateToDocSet

· PermissionsOptions

· TargetDocSetOptions

· MigrateToSubFolder

Page 196: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

196Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· TargetSubFolderOptions

· MigratePermissionsForSubFolder

· TargetDocLibOptions

· MigrateToSubSite

· TargetSubSiteOptions

· MigratePermissionsForSubSite

· TargetSubSiteTemplateOptions

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

Page 197: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

197Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

· UseAzureOffice365Upload - Indicates if the copy operation to Office 365 should use the Azure

SPO Migration Pipeline.

· EncryptAzureMigrationJobs - If the Azure SPO Migration Pipeline is being used, indicates if the

job manifest file should be encrypted.

Copy-FileAsSiteHierarchy

This is the same as Copy-FileAsHierarchy with additional parameters.

Copy-FileToSite

This is the same as Copy-File with additional parameters.

Copy-FolderAsFolder

· ExistingFolderAction - Overwrite, rename, or skip on existing folder and file with same name.

· IncludeSubFolders - Migrate subfolders.

· IncludeFiles - Migrate files.

· CorrectName - Enable/disable automatic replacement of invalid SharePoint characters in name.

· CorrectNameCharacter - Specify the replacement character for invalid SharePoint characters in

name.

· FilterExpression - Defines a collection of filters to be applied to the files.

· FileSettings - Specify the file settings.

Page 198: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

198Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· LinkCorrectionOptions - Specify the link correction options.

· PermissionsOptions - Specify the permissions options.

· TargetHierarchyOptions - Specify the target hierarchy options.

· StoragePointOptions - Specify the target StoragePoint options.

· DefaultContentType - Specify if default Content Type should be used.

· ContentTypeID - Specify the ID of the default Content Type to use.

· ContentTypeFieldMappings - Specify the Content Type field mappings.

· EmailServer - An email server to use for sending job completion emails.

· EmailUserName - A user name to use when connecting to the specified email server. If not set,

default credentials will be used.

· EmailPassword - A password to use for the specified user when connecting to the specified email

server. If no user name is set, default credentials will be used.

· ToEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to which the job completion

email will be sent.

· FromEmailAddress - The email address of the mailbox from which the job completion emails will

be sent.

· CCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to CC on the job completion

email.

· BCCEmailAddress - A semicolon delimited list of email addresses to BCC on the job completion

email.

· EmailSuccessTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job is successful.

· EmailFailureTemplateFilePath - The absolute file path of the html template to use for the job

completion email when the job fails.

· EmailSubject - A custom subject for the job completion email.

· Transformers - The collection of data transformers which the action needs to run. Note that if

the passed-in value for this parameter does not include transformers which are considered

mandatory, they will be added automatically.

· Quiet - If set, the operation will not report progress to the PowerShell console.

· JobFile - The name of a job file to use for logging. If the file does not exist it will be created.

Page 199: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

199Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

· Source - The source node for the actions.

· Target - The target node for the actions.

· JobDatabase - The connection string of a jobs database to use for logging. If the connection

string is invalid, an exception is thrown. If both 'JobFile' and 'JobDatabase' parameters are

specified, then the 'JobDatabase' parameter will take precedence and the job will only be written

to the job database.

Copy-FolderAsHierarchy

This is the same as Copy-FileAsHierarchy with additional parameters.

Copy-FolderAsList

This is the same as Copy-FolderAsFolder with additional parameters.

Copy-FolderAsSite

This is the same as Copy-FolderAsFolder with additional parameters.

Copy-FolderAsSiteHierarchy

This is the same as Copy-FileAsHierarchy with additional parameters.

Get-File

· Location - The location of the target item. (Mandatory)

Page 200: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

200Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

Get-Files

· Name - Filter files by file name.

· Extensions - Filter files by file extension.

· MinSize - Filter files by minimum file size.

· MaxSize - Filter files by maximum file size.

· CreatedBefore - Filter files by before created date.

· CreatedAfter - Filter files by after created date.

· ModifiedBefore - Filter files by before modified date.

· ModifiedAfter - Filter files by after modified date.

· Location - The location of the target item. (Mandatory)

Get-Folder

· Location - The location of the target item. (Mandatory)

Get-Folders

· Location - The location of the target item. (Mandatory)

Refresh-File

· Location - Refresh target folder. (Mandatory)

Page 201: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

201Using PowerShell with Content Matrix

Content Matrix

Refresh-Folder

· Location - Refresh target folder. (Mandatory)

Page 202: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

202Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

Modifying Content MatrixConfiguration and Settings

15

You can configure and customize a number of Metalogix Content Matrix settings, including:

· distributed migration configuration

· proxy settings

· available actions and events

· client-side Managed Metadata batch size and metabase settings

· resource utilization settings

· default settings in configuration variable files

Configuring Content Matrix for DistributedMigration

Metalogix Content Matrix can significantly improve the time it takes to complete migration jobs by

using a distributed migration model. This model essentially consists of a Metalogix Content Matrix

Console Controller (Host), a central jobs repository or queue, and one or more loosely-coupled

Metalogix Content Matrix Console agents.

Page 203: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

203Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

By automatically selecting the jobs from a central repository, Metalogix Content Matrix Console

agents are able to distribute the workload efficiently across the resource pool. The distributed

model enables parallel processing of migration jobs that reduces migration time, and enables

higher utilization, better workload throughput and higher end-user productivity from deployed

resources.

Distributed Migration supports the following SharePoint connection adapters:

· Metalogix Extensions Web Service (MEWS)

· SharePoint Client Side Object Model (CSOM)

· CSOM using the Azure Pipeline

Distributed Migration Components

Distributed Migration is typically used for large migration projects and relies on the following three

components:

Controller (or Host)

This is the primary Metalogix Content Matrix Console that manages agents, the agent database

and the migration jobs.

Agent Database

A SQL Server database that contains the repository or queue of migration job definitions which the

agents can execute.

NOTE: The agent database cannot be a SQL CE database.

Agents

This is a physical or virtual machine that is remote from the Controller machine. It is connected to

through the Controller to run jobs remotely. Once connected, the Controller will push an

installation of the Metalogix Content Matrix Console onto the Agent machine, which is then

configured to execute the migration jobs that are sent from the Controller. Any logging information

would then be sent to the Agent Database. When an agent is executing a migration job, any

interaction with the agent such as changing a configuration setting is not recommended.

Page 204: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

204Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

Distributed Migration System Requirements

Requirements for the Controller (Host) machine

· Metalogix Content Matrix Console must be installed and set-up on the Controller machine. For

details on this, please see the Metalogix Content Matrix Console Advanced Installation Guide.

· The User account that is connecting to and running migrations from the Controller to the Agent

machines will require Administrator permissions on both the Controller machine and all of the

Agent Machines.

· An X.509 Certificate must be created for the Controller and the same certificate can be installed

on all machines in the Distributed Migration model. You do not need to create multiple X.509

certificate files. For more information about creating an X.509 certificate, please see Creating

an X.509 Security Certificate for Distributed Migration. For more information about installing

an X.509 certificate, please see Installing an X.509 Security Certificate for Remote Agents

section.

· The default Metabase settings for Metalogix Content Matrix must be reconfigured to use SQL

Server and not a SQL CE database. For more information about configuring the Metabase

settings, see Configuring Metabase Settings.

Requirements for the Agent Database

· The Agent Database must use SQL Server 2008 or later.

· The Agent Database can reside on the Controller machine or any other machine in network,

provided that the Agents and Controller have access to that machine.

· The Agent database should be created from the Metalogix Content Matrix Console. For more

information, see Creating an Agent Database.

NOTE: It is recommended that SQL Server Authentication is used to connect to the Agent

Database.

Requirements for an Agent Machine

· An agent machine can be a physical or a virtual machine with 1 GB of free RAM, plus double

the size of the largest file being migrated in free RAM.

· The operating system can be Windows 7, 8, 8.1, 10 or Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 or

later.

· Microsoft .NET Framework 4.6 or higher must be installed on the machine.

· The Agent machine must meet all the prerequisites as specified in the Metalogix Content

Matrix Console Advanced Installation Guide.

· It must allow remote connections to itself.

NOTE: It is recommended that the Agent be in the same network as the Controller.

Page 205: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

205Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

· All instances of Windows PowerShell must be closed.

· An X.509 Security certificate must be created and installed on all machines in the Distributed

Migration model. For more information about creating an SSL certificate, please see the

Creating an X.509 Security Certificate for Distributed Migration section. For more information

about installing an .509 Security certificate, please see the Installing an X.509 Certificate for

Remote Agents section.

· The following services must be started:

§ Remote Registry

§ Server Service

§ Workstation Service

Also note that when connecting to an Agent machine the Controller will try to install a copy of

Metalogix Content Matrix Console on that Agent. In order to do this Metalogix Content Matrix (on

the Controller machine) will look at the following folder location (local to itself) "C:

\ProgramData\Metalogix" to see if a copy of the install file is present. It will look for the installer

file using the naming convention: Metalogix_Content_Matrix_Console_Setup_8_1_0001.exe. If the

file is found, then the installer will be copied to the Agent and deployed. If the file is NOT found,

then Metalogix Content Matrix will try to copy the installer from the Metalogix website, rename

the download when it completes, then copy that file to the Agent.

Using the Wizard to Set Up Distributed Migration

When using the Distributed Migration feature, a "Controller" machine can be configured to

distribute migration jobs to Agent machines in a hub-and-spoke model to help run migration jobs

in parallel, to help maximize overall performance. There is a Metalogix Content Matrix Distributed

Migration Wizard that is designed to help streamline and configure the setup for both the

Controller and Agent machines.

Alternatively, you can set up Distributed Migration manually.

Before setting up Distributed Migration:

Make sure your Controller (Host) machine, Agent Database, and Agent machines meet Distributed

Migration Component Requirements.

To use the Distributed Migration Wizard:

1. In the Metalogix Content Matrix ribbon Connection tab, click Configure Distributed Migration.

Page 206: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

206Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

The Wizard begins the configuration process with a Getting Started section. Review the

information presented on this screen before proceeding to the next step.

NOTE: Agent machines use a SQL database to share information with each other. This

database must reside in a location that all Agent machines, as well as the Controller, are able to

access. Please see Agent Databases for Distributed Migration for more details.

2. Click [Next].

3. To Provision Agent Database, either:

4. Enter the address of the SQL server where the database is located

Page 207: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

207Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

OR

5. Use the [Browse] button by the SQL Server field to browse for servers on the local system and

on the network, then click [OK] to return to the Provision Agent Database dialog.

6. Enter the name of an existing SQL database in the SQL Database field, or click [Browse] to view

the databases located on the chosen SQL server. To create a new database, select [New

Database] in the Browse window, and enter a name for it.

Page 208: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

208Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

7. If specific authentication credentials are required in order to log in to the SQL server, enter

them in the appropriate fields. It is recommended that SQL Server Authentication is used to

connect to the Agent Database.

8. Click [Next].

9. To Configure Metabase, choose a SQL server and database to use for the Metabase database

(which is used by Metalogix Content Matrix to store metadata during the migration process)

just as you chose a server and Agent Database in the previous steps.

10. If specific authentication credentials are required in order to log in to the SQL server, enter

them in the appropriate fields. Then click [Next].

The Wizard will now enable you to copy application, environment, and user mapping settings

files from the Controller machine to the Agent database to be used in place of the default

settings on the Agent machines. Please see the Updating an Agent topic for more details.

Page 209: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

209Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

11. Select Copy Settings to copy UserSettings.xml, EnvironmentSettings.xml, and

ApplicationSettings.xml from the local system to the Agent database.

A confirmation displays after the settings have been successfully copied.

NOTE: After these settings have been copied to the Agent database and the console has been

restarted, Metalogix Content Matrix will no longer look in local settings files for configuration

information. This means that changing local settings files will have no effect on the console's

operations.

If changes need to be made to settings after copying them over to the Agent database, make

the necessary changes to configuration files on the local system, and then copy those files over

to the Agent database using the Wizard.

12. Click [Next].

13. For Create Certificate, select an existing certificate to use, or create a new one via the

[Generate New Certificate] button.

Page 210: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

210Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

When creating a new certificate, make sure to use a certificate name that does not contain any

spaces. Also use a robust password that you will remember, and export the certificate to a

folder where it can be found again in the future.

NOTE: Metalogix Content Matrix utilizes security certificates in distributed migrations to

maintain secure communication between the Controller and Agent machines. This certificate

will automatically be used for the Controller machine where the Wizard is currently running

from, whether or not it was generated now or at a previous time. Please see Installing an X.509

Certificate for Use with Remote Agents for more details.

14. Click [Next>].

15. For Download Installer, select [Download Installer] to download a new copy of the installer to

that system.

Please see Distributed Migration System Requirements for more details.

Page 211: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

211Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

An indicator will appear at the bottom of the Wizard indicating that the download is in

progress. Click [Next >] when the button becomes available after the download operation has

completed.

16. Enter the name of the Agent computer in the Agent Name field to find it by name, or select

[Browse...] to browse for it in the network. The IP address of the system can also be used to

locate and connect to it.

REMINDER: It is recommended that the Agent should be on the same network as the

Controller.

Page 212: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

212Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

NOTE: Make sure to enter the correct user name and password for the system before

proceeding.

17. Click [Next ].

NOTE: If the Wizard finds that any of the services are not running, click [Enable Missing

Services] to have the Wizard attempt to enable those services remotely.

Windows Server 2008 R2 or later is the recommended minimum Operating System to be used

for Agent machines in Distributed Migration. If the Agent does not meet this requirement, the

Page 213: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

213Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

Wizard will throw a warning message, but it will allow you to proceed so long as the above

services are available.

18. When all services are enabled and you are ready to proceed, click [Next >].

19. For Deploy Certificate, click [Deploy Certificate] to deploy the certificate configured above to

the Agent system.

A confirmation message displays, confirming successful deployment.

Click [Next>].

20. For Install Agent, select [Deploy Metalogix Content Matrix] to begin the deployment

procedure. An indicator displays at the bottom of the Wizard indicating that the deployment is

in progress.

Page 214: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

214Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

The Summary windows shows the configuration options that have been selected for

deployment, and the status of the deployment to the specified Agent(s).

21. To add additional Agents to the distributed migration, click [Deploy New]. The Wizard will then

return to the Configure Agents screen (shown above) where the last step can be repeated for

the additional Agent.

22. Click [Finish] at the bottom of the Summary screen to close the Distributed Migration Wizard.

23. Close the console and start it up again to make use of the new settings.

Page 215: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

215Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

Setting Up Distributed Migration Manually

(Alternatively, you can use the Wizard to set up Distributed Migration.)

Before setting up Distributed Migration:

Make sure your Controller (Host) machine, Agent Database, and Agent machines meet Distributed

Migration System Requirements.

Manual Distributed Migration Setup Tasks

To manually set up distributed migration, you must perform the following tasks

A. Install X.509 Certificates for use with Remote Agents on all machines.

B. Open the Metalogix Content Matrix Console application on your Controller (Host) machine,

and perform the following:

§ Create/Connect to the Agent Database.

§ Add Agents.

Installing an X.509 Security Certificate forRemote Agents

An X.509 certificate must be created and then installed on all machines in the Distributed Migration

model, and the same certificate must be copied and installed on every Agent that participates in

the distributed migration model.

Following is an example of how to install an X.509 security certificate, specifically for use with the

Distributed Migration model Controller and Agent machines. It covers how to install a certificate

and provides one method for creating certificates.

Please contact your IT administrator for assistance with the installation of a certificate signed by a

certificate authority.

To install an X.509 Certificate for use with Distributed Migration:

1. Log into the (Controller or Agent) machine as the Windows administrator.

2. Double-click the certificate file that you want to install.

The Certificate Import Wizard opens.

Page 216: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

216Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

3. Keep the default selection and click [Next].

4. Verify the file shown in the [File name] field. Click [Next].

5. Specify the password. (Keep the default settings as they are.) Click [Next].

Page 217: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

217Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

6. Keep the default settings as they are. Click [Next].

7. Click [Finish]. (You will then be prompted to confirm the installation.)

The certificate is installed on the machine. To install the certificate on agent machines, log in to the

agent machines as the windows administrator, copy the certificate to the agent machine and

repeat these instructions.

Creating an X.509 Security Certificate forDistributed Migration

There are multiple ways to create an X.509 Certificate. It is usually recommended to talk to your

System Administrator/IT administrator or Security specialist in order to get one created for you.

However, if you need to create one yourself, below are some basic steps to generate a basic

certificate that will work with your Distributed Migration deployment.

Page 218: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

218Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

The following instructions can help you generate a self-signed certificate for test purposes only.

Please contact your IT administrator for assistance with the creation and installation of certificate

signed by a certificate authority.

1. From the Controller machine Start menu, search for Internet Information Services (IIS)

Manager and open it.

2. In the Connections pane on the left-hand side, click on the server name.

3. In Features pane, double-click Server Certificates in the IIS section.

4. In the Actions pane on the right-hand side, click Create Self-Signed Certificate. The Create Self-

Signed Certificate dialog appears.

5. In the Specify a friendly name for the certificate field enter a desired name.

6. Click [OK].

7. In the Server Certificates list, select the certificate you just created, and right-click to display the

actions menu.

8. In the Export Certificate dialog, enter the location in the Export to field. Enter and confirm a

password in the password fields.

Page 219: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

219Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

9. Click [OK]. The certificate file is exported to the specified location.

In addition to the above steps there are some alternative methods that can also be used to create

certificates. Some examples can be found at the following locations:

· https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/desktop/aa386968%28v=vs.85%29.aspx

· http://www.howtogeek.com/107415/it-how-to-create-a-self-signed-security-ssl-certificate-

and-deploy-it-to-client-machines

Agent Databases for Distributed Migration

Following are instructions for manually creating an Agent Database for use with the Distributed

Migration feature, as well as how to connect to an Agent Database.

To create and/or connect to an Agent Database

1. From the Controller machine, in the Jobs List section of the Metalogix Content Matrix Console,

choose File > Connect to Agent Database to display the Connect to Agent Database dialog.

2. In the SQL Server field, enter name of the SQL server. You can manually enter the name or IP

address of the SQL server.

Alternatively, you can click [Browse] to open the SQL Server Browser dialog, and select from

any of the listed servers.

Page 220: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

220Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

3. Use the information in the following table to determine the appropriate action to take. for SQL

Database

If …. Then …

You are configuring Distributed

Migration for the first time and

need to create the Agent database

A. Click [Browse] to open the Database Browser

dialog.

B. Click New Database to display the Create New

Database dialog.

C. In the Name field, enter the name you want to

use for the Agent Database, and click [OK]. The

new Database will be added to the list. Select

this Database and click [OK].

D. Click [OK] to create the database and redisplay

the Connect to Agent Database dialog.

the Agent database already exists Either:

· Manually enter the SQL Database Name

OR

· Click [Browse] to open the Database Browser

dialog and select the Agent database from the

list.

4. Select the appropriate Authentication option. Use the information in the following table for

guidance.

Page 221: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

221Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

If you want to … Then …

use the default Windows

authentication method of the

currently logged in user

select Use Current Windows User.

use the database

authentication to validate the

user

Use SQL Server Login.

NOTE: This is the recommended option, and should

be used when the Agent database is on another

server and the Windows authentication for that

server is not the same as the current user's

credentials.

Clicking the Remember my password check-box will

allow Metalogix Content Matrix to remember the

password for this SQL Server Authentication account.

5. Click Connect to establish the connection to the Agent Database.

NOTE: If you are logged into Metalogix Content Matrix with the default settings, you are

probably connected to the SQL CE repository. If you subsequently establish a connection to an

Agent Database that is based on SQL Server, then you will be prompted with a message asking

if you want to copy the configuration settings (application, environment, and user settings) to

the Agent Database.

6. Click Yes to continue with the copy process. This is a recommended step. Alternatively, click No

to prevent the copy.

Every time you switch to the Agent database or move from an Agent Database back to SQL CE,

you will see the message box to copy configuration settings.

§ Message when you connect from an Agent Database to SQL CE:

§ Message when you connect from one Agent Database to another Agent Database:

Page 222: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

222Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

§ If you have agreed to copy the configuration settings, a confirmation dialog appears:

7. Click [OK] to complete the process. Then close and restart the Metalogix Content Matrix

Console.

When you restart the Metalogix Content Matrix Console, verify that the Job List section is

displaying the details of the Agent Database, and the Manage Agents and Manage Queue buttons

are enabled in the Metalogix Content Matrix Console ribbon.

Managing Agents

The Metalogix Content Matrix Console that is set up as the controller (or Host), provides a single

point of management control with the ability to add, view, edit, update, refresh and remove

agents.

To open the Manage Agents dialog:

From the Metalogix Content Matrix Console Jobs List ribbon, click Manage Agents.

Page 223: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

223Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

NOTE: If the Manage Agents button appears disabled, your Metalogix Content Matrix Console

edition is not connected to a configured Agent Database.

The Manage Agent dialog presents a toolbar with the following options:

· Add Agent - Allows you to automate the set up and configuration of a Metalogix Content

Matrix Agent.

· View Agent - Displays more information about a selected agent such as log history, and other

pertinent information.

· Edit Agent - Allows you to change the credentials of a selected Agent.

· Update Agent - Updates the Metalogix Content Matrix Console, license file, and all the mapping

files on the selected Agent.

· Refresh Agent - Displays the most recent status of a selected Agent.

· Remove Agent - Deletes the Agent definition from the Agent Database but preserves the

application and other files on the Agent machine.

The Manage Agents dialog also displays a list of Metalogix Content Matrix Agents. The

information presented in the various columns are as follows:

Column Description

Agent Name Name of the physical or virtual machine that is set up as an Agent.

OS Version The version of the operating system used by the Agent.

Metalogix

Content Matrix

Version

The version of the Metalogix Content Matrix edition installed on the

Agent.

Run As Down-level logon name to access the Agent. For example,

mydomain\administrator

Status Recent state of the Agent. The status values could be one of the

following values:

Available - the Agent is ready to start a new migration job.

Busy - the Agent is running a migration job.

Error - the Agent has encountered a fault condition.

Configuring - the Agent is being set up.

Log Message The most recent log message. To view the log history and other

pertinent information, see Viewing Agent Details.

In addition to the information presented in the columns, you can select an Agent from the list by

clicking anywhere on the row. A row selector icon and the highlighted row indicates the selected

Page 224: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

224Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

row. If you right-click the selected row, all actions other than the ability to add an Agent is

displayed as a pop-up menu as shown below.

NOTE: If the Status of the selected row is Busy, then the Edit Agent and Update Agent actions are

disabled. If the Status of the selected row is Configuring, then the Edit Agent, Update Agent and

Refresh Agent actions are disabled.

Adding an Agent

To add an agent:

1. From the Manage Agents dialog, click Add Agent.

1. In the Agent Name field, enter the name of the physical or virtual machine to set up as a

Metalogix Content Matrix agent.

Alternatively, click [Browse] to open the Agent Browser dialog. You can select from any of the

listed computers. The computers that are listed in the Agent Browser dialog are a list of

Page 225: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

225Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

networked computers and not necessarily Metalogix Content Matrix agents. Contact your

system administrator if you are not sure which machine should be selected as a candidate

agent.

2. In the IP Address field, enter the Internet Protocol identifier of the physical or virtual machine

you want to add as an agent.

NOTE: If the value you entered in the Agent Name field can be resolved successfully, the IP

Address field is automatically filled. If you have entered a value in the Agent Name field and

the IP Address field manually, and both values resolve to a valid physical or virtual machine,

then the value specified in the IP Address field will take precedence.

3. Specify the agent credentials in the Connect As section as follows:

a) In the User Name field enter the down-level logon name of the windows administrator to

access the Agent. For example, enter 'mydomain\administrator'.

b) In the Password field, enter the password required for authentication.

NOTE: The agent credentials will be saved to the Windows Vault on the Controller (Host)

machine. The credentials will be updated if the agent specifications are edited. For more

information, please see Editing an Agent. The agent credentials will be deleted when the agent

is removed from Agent Database. For more information, please see Removing an Agent.

4. Click the [Browse] button by the Location field and choose a security certificate (PFX file) to

deploy to the Agent.

5. Enter the password for the security certificate in the Password field.

6. Click [Connect].

This action adds the Agent to the Agent Database and copies the Metalogix Content Matrix

installer files, Application Mapping files, and the licensing file to the specified agent. All editions

of the Metalogix Content Matrix Console are silently installed and configured on the selected

Agent.

The new Agent appears in the list of Agents in the Manage Agents dialog. The Status value is

'Configuring'.

Viewing Agent Details

To view Agent details:

1. From the Manage Agents dialog, select an Agent in the list.

2. Click View Agent.

Page 226: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

226Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

The table below describes the information in the Agent Details dialog.:

Field Description

Agent

NameName of the physical or virtual machine that is set up as an Agent.

IP Address The Internet Protocol identifier of the Agent.

OS Version The version of the operating system used by the Agent.

CM VersionThe version of the Metalogix Content Matrix Console installed on the

Agent.

Connected

As

Down-level logon name used to access the Agent. For example,

mydomain\administrator.

Agent

Output

List of log messages from the Agent prefixed with a time stamp. The most

recent message appears at the top of the list.

Page 227: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

227Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

Editing an Agent

You can change the account credentials of an Agent via the Edit Agent dialog.

To edit an Agent:

1. From the Manage Agents dialog, select the Agent whose credentials you want to change.

2. Click Edit Agent to display the Edit Agent dialog.

Note that the Agent Name and IP Address fields are read-only and disabled. The [Browse]

button is also disabled.

3. If necessary, change the User Name and/or Password.

4. Click [Connect] to update the credentials.

Updating an Agent

You can update the Metalogix Content Matrix Console versions and the application mapping files

via the Update Agent dialog.

To update an agent:

1. From the Manage Agents dialog, select the agent you want to update.

2. Click Update Agent. to display the Update Agency dialog.

Page 228: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

228Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

3. Select one of the options described in the following table:

If you want to … Select …

update the Metalogix Content Matrix

Console version installed on the selected

Agent to match the Controller version

Update Metalogix Content Matrix Consoles

NOTES:

· If the Controller (Host) version matches

the version installed on the Agent, then

the message 'Metalogix Content Matrix

Consoles with same version is already

installed' is logged.

· If the Controller (Host) version is older

than the Agent version, then the update

fails, and the message 'Installation failed'

is logged.

· License file and Mapping files will be

updated every time, even when no

updates are required.

copy the latest application mapping files

(UserSettings.xml, EnvironmentSettings.xml,

and ApplicationSettings.xml) from the

Controller (Host) to the Agent

Update Application Mappings only.

4. Click [OK].

The Update Agent dialog closes and the selected update is completed if possible. The status

will change to Configuring until the update completes. If the update is successful, the status

changes to Available.

NOTE: To view the current status, click Refresh Agent. To see other logged messages, click

View Agent,

Page 229: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

229Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

Refreshing an Agent

To refresh an Agent:

1. From the Manage Agents dialog, select the Agent whose status you want to refresh.

2. Click Refresh Agent.

The information about the selected agent is re-queried from the Agent Database and

presented in the Agent list. For example, if the state of the Agent has changed since the

previous refresh and the Manage Agent dialog is still open, the Status of the selected Agent will

change.

NOTE: A refresh also occurs whenever the Manage Agents dialog is opened.

Removing an Agent

Note: When an Agent is removed, the Agent definition is deleted from the Agent Database. The

Metalogix Content Matrix Console, the application file mappings and License files are not

removed from the Agent machine.

1. From the Manage Agents dialog, select the Agent you want to remove.

2. Click Remove Agent.

A dialog displays asking you to confirm the removal.

Configuring Proxy Settings

In most cases Metalogix Content Matrix can automatically connect to SharePoint and authenticate

license keys, through an environment's proxy setting, however, in some cases the proxy may need

to be configured within Metalogix Content Matrix. In these cases users can specify the proxy

settings though the connecting dialog. This page will review how to set the proxy settings for these

special cases.

There are two basic places where this proxy setting can be configured. The first of these is when

activating a license key, and the second when connecting to a SharePoint server. While the options

dialogs for these two options will look slightly different (due to one displaying other options tabs to

the left-hand side of the main options), the steps for the proxy configuration are the same in both

cases.

Page 230: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

230Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

To configure proxy settings:

1. In the Proxy server dialog, check the Enable proxy box.

2. Enter the Server name (or IP) and Port for the proxy.

3. Specify the credentials to be used when connecting to the target SharePoint server.

The Windows authenticated credentials of the current user will be selected by default. You can

specify alternate SharePoint credentials by clicking the Different user radio button, and

entering an alternate username and password

4. If you accessed the dialog from the License Activation dialog, click [Set].

NOTE: If this method does not seem to be working, you can manually configure Metalogix

Content Matrix to use a proxy setting. See Manually Configuring Proxy Settings.

Manually Configuring Proxy Settings

If, for some reason, Metalogix Content Matrix cannot connect through a proxy, then the proxy

settings can be configured through the Metalogix Content Matrix UI. If you are not able to

configure the proxy settings through the product's UI for some reason, it can be configured

Page 231: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

231Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

manually. The below directions should help you manually configure some explicit proxy settings,

enabling the product to work with your proxy.

To manually configure proxy settings:

1. Open the Metalogix Content Matrix Console and add a connection to the desired SharePoint

location.

2. After a connection has been added, close Metalogix Content Matrix.

3. Open the ActiveConnections.xml file, which can be found in one of the following locations, in a

text editor:

§ Microsoft Vista/Windows 7/Windows8/Windows 10 based systems - <DRIVE>:

\Users\<USER>\AppData\Roaming\Metalogix\Metalogix Content Matrix Console -

<Product> Edition

§ Microsoft Windows XP based systems (Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000,

Windows 2003, and Windows XP) - <DRIVE>:\Documents and Settings\<USER>\Application

Data\Metalogix\Metalogix Content Matrix Console - <Product> Edition

Within the XML file there is a <Connection /> XML element for each added connection. In order

for proxy settings to be added to a connection, another element needs to be added inside the

connection XML. The added element should be named Proxy, and it should have an attribute

named Url. The value for this Url attribute should be the actual URL for the proxy that will be

used.

For example, if we are trying to add a proxy connection to the following node:

<Connection NodeType="Metalogix.SharePoint.SPWeb,Metalogix.SharePoint, Version=1.0.0.0, Culture=neutral,PublicKeyToken=3b240fac3e39fc03" AdapterType="WS"Url=http://SharePoint2010 />

We would add: <Proxy Url="http://metalogixproxy:8000/" />. So the end result

would be:

<Connection NodeType="Metalogix.SharePoint.SPWeb,Metalogix.SharePoint, Version=1.0.0.0, Culture=neutral,PublicKeyToken=3b240fac3e39fc03" AdapterType="WS"Url="http://SharePoint2010">

<Proxy Url="http://metalogixproxy:8000/" />

</Connection>

If the proxy connection requires a user name and password that differ from your normal

logged in Windows credentials, then these can also be specified in the Proxy element. The

attribute UserName can be used to enter a user name (in domain\user format), and an

attribute named Password can be used to enter the password value.

In this case the Proxy value <Proxy Url="http://metalogixproxy:8000/" />

would become:

Page 232: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

232Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

<Proxy Url="http://metalogixproxy:8000/"UserName="DOMAIN\ProxyUser" Password="ProxyPassword" />

4. After these values have been entered to the desired connection, save and close the

ActiveConnections.xml file.

5. Re-launch Metalogix Content Matrix.

The connection using the proxy should now be configured, and the connection should be

established and working.

Restricting Available Actions and SuppressingEvents

Metalogix Content Matrix provides you with the ability to control what actions are available to the

client application through configuring on the SharePoint server. Product behaviors can be

restricted along three dimensions:

· Available actions

· Unrestricted users

· Suppressed events

Configuring the behavior of the Metalogix Content Matrix client from target SharePoint servers

requires that an XML configuration file be added to the target SharePoint server web application

directory. The XML file must be named ServerAdapterConfig.xml and placed in the ML folder

directory located within the SharePoint hive (this is the same directory where the Metalogix

SharePoint Extensions Web Service files are). Below are some examples of the typical directory

location of the ML folder, depending on SharePoint product version and configuration:

· SharePoint 2007: - C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\12\isapi\ML

· SharePoint 2010: - C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\14\isapi\ML

· SharePoint 2013: - C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\15\isapi\ML

· SharePoint 2016: - C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\16\isapi\ML

ServerAdapterConfig.xml File Format

Below is an example of the simple XML format required for ServerAdapterConfig.xml.

<ServerAdapterConfig>

<DisabledActions>

Page 233: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

233Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

<Action>Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteSiteAction</Action>

<Action>Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteSiteCollectionAction</Action>

<Action>Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteSiteLists</Action>

<Action>Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopyRoleAssignmentsAction</Action>

<Action>Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopyWorkflowAssociationsAction</Action>

<Action>Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteFolderAction</Action>

</DisabledActions>

<ExemptUsers>

<User>METALOGIX\geordie</User>

<User>METALOGIX\julien</User>

</ExemptUsers>

<SuppressEvents>False</SuppressEvents>

</ServerAdapterConfig>

There are three main sections within the root ServerAdapterConfig section of this XML:

· DisabledActions: This section defines the set of actions that cannot be run on the client. See

Actions That Can Be Disabled on the Server Side for a complete list.

· ExemptUsers: This section defines the set of users by user name who are exempt from any

DisabledActions. In other words, a user in the ExemptUsers is not subject to any restrictions

imposed on Metalogix Content Matrix clients by the DisableActions section.

· SuppressEvents: This section defines if any of SharePoint's event receivers are

suppressed/disabled during a migration and then restarted once the action is complete. The

value for this section is set to "True" by default, but can be manually configured if want event

suppression to be disabled. Suppression of event receivers allows Metalogix Content Matrix to

avoid any potential concurrency issues when migrating (mainly with regards to workflows).

Actions That Can Be Disabled on the Server Side

Many of the SharePoint related actions available in the Metalogix Content Matrix Console can be

disabled on the server side. The table below lists the complete set of client actions that can be

disabled from the server and provides the format of the action name required in the

DisabledActions section of the ServerAdapaterCongifuration.xml file.

Page 234: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

234Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

NOTE: When an action that is available via the client UI is disabled on the server, it will be visible

in client menus but disabled.

Action Configuration File Format

Change Global

Navigation Settings

Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.ChangeGlobalNavigationAc

tion

Change Quick Launch Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.ChangeQuickLaunchAction

Create Folder Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.CreateFolderAction

Create List Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.CreateListAction

Create List From XML Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.CreateListFromXMLAction

Create Site Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.CreateSiteAction

Create Site Collection Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.CreateSiteCollection

Create Site Collection

in Self-Service Mode

Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.CreateSiteCollectionSelfSer

viceMode

Delete Discussion

ItemMetalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.DeleteDiscussionItem

Delete Item Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.DeleteFolder

Delete List Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.DeleteItem

Delete Site Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.DeleteList

Delete Site Collection Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.DeleteSite

Export Doc Items Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.DeleteSiteCollection

Publish Documents

and Pages

Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.PublishDocumentsandPage

sAction

Update Site

Collection Settings

Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Administration.UpdateSiteCollectionSettin

gsAction

Add Role

AssignmentsMetalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.AddRoleAssignmentsAction

Copy Folder

PermissionsMetalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopyFolderPermissions

Copy Item Alerts Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopyItemAlertsAction

Copy List Alerts Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopyListAlertsAction

Copy List Permissions Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopyListPermissions

Page 235: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

235Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

Action Configuration File Format

Copy List Role

AssignmentsMetalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopyListRoleAssignments

Paste Web Parts Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopyWebPartsAction

Paste Master Page

GalleryMetalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopyMasterPageGalleryAction

Paste Content Types Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopySiteContentTypesAction

Paste All Subsites Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopySubSitesAction

Copy Web Alerts Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopyWebAlertsAction

Copy Web

PermissionsMetalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopyWebPermissions

Paste Workflow

Associations

Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.CopyWorkflowAssociationsActio

n

Paste All List Items Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteAllListItemsAction

Paste All List Items

into Items View

Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteAllListItemsIntoItemsView

Action

Paste Audiences Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteAudiencesAction

Paste Default Web

Part Page

Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteDefaultWebPartPageActio

n

Paste Duplicate List Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteDuplicateListAction

Paste Duplicate Site Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteDuplicateSiteAction

Paste Folder Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteFolderAction

Paste List Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteListAction

Paste List as Folder Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteListAsFolderAction

Paste List Email

NotificationsMetalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteListEmailNotificationAction

Paste List Item Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteListItemAction

Paste List Item into

Items View

Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteListItemIntoItemsViewActi

on

Paste My Sites Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteMySitesAction

Paste Navigation Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteNavigationAction

Paste Roles Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteRolesAction

Page 236: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

236Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

Action Configuration File Format

Paste Site Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteSiteAction

Paste Site Collection Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteSiteCollectionAction

Paste Site Collection

in Self Service Mode

Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteSiteCollectionSelfServiceAc

tion

Paste Site Content Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteSiteContentAction

Paste Site Lists Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.PasteSiteLists

Remove Role

AssignmentsMetalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.RemoveRoleAssignmentAction

Event Suppression Metalogix.SharePoint.Actions.Migration.SuppressEvents

Note that many of the above listed actions are used by other actions. When a given action is

enabled, but one or more of its sub-action is disabled, the sub-actions will not run. When a user

attempts to run an action for which sub-actions are disabled, they will be notified with a dialog

similar to the following:

Client Side Configuration

For an individual Metalogix Content Matrix Console instance, you can Change the Managed

Metadata Migration Batch Size and/or Configure Metabase Settings

Changing the Managed Metadata MigrationBatch Size

In order to better handle operations that include the migration of Managed Metadata having a

very large number of terms or keywords, Metalogix Content Matrix separates migration operations

into batches. This helps prevent timeouts during migration operations.

Page 237: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

237Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

The default batch size is 50 terms, but this value can be changed through a parameter in the

EnvironmentSettings.xml file.

To change the Managed Metadata Migration Batch Size:

1. Make sure that the Metalogix Content Matrix Console is closed.

2. Navigate to EnvironmentSettings.xml and open the file in a text editor.

By default, this file is located in the following directory: [Drive]:\Users\[User name]\Application

Data\Metalogix\Metalogix Content Matrix Console - SharePoint Edition

3. Navigate to the MMDTermsBatchSize entry and change its value to the desired batch size. The

value must be a positive integer.

4. Save and close EnvironmentSettings.xml and reopen Metalogix Content Matrix Console.

Configuring Metabase Settings

Metalogix Content Matrix lets you configure the location of the Metabase file, which is a SQL CE

(Compact Edition) database file that is used for storing metadata for a specific purpose, for a

Console instance. The metabase temporarily holds any migrating content's metadata so it can be

moved into the target SharePoint instance. This allows for any metadata to be used with other

features, such as Transformers. The Metabase file itself is both created and deleted during the

course of a migration action.

To configure Metabase settings:

1. In the Metalogix Content Matrix Console ribbon, choose Settings > Configure Default Metabase

Settings to display the Change Metabase Default Settings dialog.

2. Select the appropriate configuration option. Use the information in the following table for

guidance.

Page 238: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

238Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

If you want to … Then …

specify a new folder in which to create the

Metabase

· Select Provision New SQL Server Compact

database.

· Click the folder icon ( ) and select the

new location.

select an existing SQL Server Compact

database (SDF) to use for the Metabase

· Select Use SQL Server Compact Database.

· Click the database/file icon ( ) and

select the existing Metabase.

NOTE: Metalogix Content Matrix will add

and remove the Metabase tables during the

migration.

select a SQL Server database in which to

create and delete the Metabase tables

NOTE: This option allows Metalogix

Content Matrix to place the Metabase

directly into SQL Server. The main benefit

being that it can allow for a performance

boost when migrating large amounts of

· Select Use SQL Server database.

· Click the database icon ( ).

· Connect to the SQL Server using one of

the following options:

Page 239: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

239Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

If you want to … Then …

content, since it has a direct connection to

SQL Server, and the Metabase logs will have

a 4GB limitation that SQL Server files have.

§ Manually enter the name or IP

address for the SharePoint Database

you want to connect to.

OR

§ Chose a previously accessed SQL

server from the drop-down.

OR

§ Click [Browse] then navigate to and

select either a Local or Network SQL

server.

3. Click [OK].

Changing Resource Utilization Settings

Metalogix Content Matrix can manage its performance level through the Resource Utilization

Setting. This type of management is also known as throttling, and is used for any migration action

that is run with Metalogix Content Matrix.

To edit Resource Utilization Settings:

From the Contrent Matrix Console ribbon, choose Settings > Edit Resource Utilization Settings.

Page 240: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

240Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

By default, the Efficiency value is set in the center or the slide bar. This is the recommended setting

for best performance and resource utilization (use of RAM, CPU, Network and SharePoint load)

during a migration.

If the slide bar is further to the left, the migration will run more slowly, but will have less chances

of overloading the available resources and causing potential errors. If the slide bar is further to the

right, it with use more system resources, and can speed the migration up, but could cause some

potential errors if the system resources cannot handle the data being migrated. There is a chance

that if the speed is too high, you would actually see a slowdown in the overall migration, because

the migration is trying to run actions faster than the resources properly allow.

The actual values that are provided in the slide bar are determined by the systems resources (the

system that has the Metalogix Content Matrix installed on it). A system with high resources will be

able to run faster migrations, even if using the default setting, because over all available resources

will be higher. This also means that the Efficiency and Speed values will have a larger spread

between them. A system that has low resources will run more slowly, simply because it doesn't

have the resources to run at faster levels. Again, this also affects the default values for Efficiency

and Speed, since these numbers will be lower, and have a smaller spread between them.

NOTE: If the Efficiency is set to its maximum (all the way to the left), the migration will run more

slowly, but the "slowest" speed will be the same between systems with high and low resources.

The "slowest" value between systems will always be the same, however, the *"highest" value will

be different based on the systems resources.

While this value can be set through the Contrent Matrix Console, you can also set it through the

back end, if the UI setting does not seem to be working for you. Please contact Quest Support for

more information on this back end setting.

Configuration Variable Files

Metalogix Content Matrix uses a set of configuration variable files behind the scenes to help set

and manage settings for all of the Metalogix Content Matrix Editions. This section explains what

the configuration variable files are, their general behavior, and where to find them.

Page 241: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

241Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

In previous versions of Metalogix Content Matrix Console (V.6.0.0.1 and earlier, including the

Migration Manager for SharePoint V3, V4, and V5 framework) the configuration variable files that

were used for each user account and product Edition were contained in the

EnvironmentSettings.xml file under each user's Profile.

Since then, Environmental Settings have been broken down into the following three files:

· EnvironmentSettings.xml

· UserSettings.xml

· ApplicationSettings.xml

These files are saved in different system locations and contain different settings, which allows

some of the environmental settings to be configured for all users and Product Editions. Some

settings can be configured for all Product Editions for a single user account, while other settings are

limited to individual Product Editions.

NOTE: If the previous incarnation of the EnvironmentSettings.xml file still exists in the old folder

location (<Drive>:\Users\<USER>\AppData\Roaming\Metalogix\Metalogix Content Matrix

Console - <Product> Edition), the values for the settings will be pulled from this file into the three

new configuration variable files.

Any settings that are configured in multiple files will be scoped to the lowest level (either in the

"UserSettings.xml" file or the "ApplicationSettings.xml" file), including values that are pulled from

the old EnvironmentSettings.xml file.

EnvironmentSettings.xml File

This file allows users to configure general settings for all Product Editions and all users. This means

that these settings only need to be set in a single file, and they will be configured for all user

accounts and all Product Editions on the installed machine. The location of this file depends on the

version of Windows:

· Microsoft Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 10 based systems:

<Drive>:\ProgramData\Metalogix

· Microsoft Windows XP based systems (Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows

2003, and Windows XP):

<Drive>:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Metalogix

UserSettings.xml File

This file allows users to configure general settings for all Product Editions for a specific user

account (the logged in account). This means that these settings will be configured for all Product

Editions, but only for the current user account. If another user would like to configure these same

settings to work for them, they must be configured manually under the appropriate user account.

The location of this file depends on the version of Windows:

· Microsoft Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 10 based systems

<Drive>:\Users\<USER>\AppData\Roaming\Metalogix

Page 242: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

242Modifying Content Matrix Configuration and Settings

Content Matrix

· Microsoft Windows XP based systems (Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows

2003, and Windows XP)

<Drive>:\Documents and Settings\<USER>\Application Data\Application Data\Metalogix

ApplicationSettings.xml File

This file allows users to configure settings that are limited to the specific Product Edition of

Metalogix Content Matrix Console, for a specific user account (the logged in account). This means

that each Product Edition, for every user account, must be configuredindividually. While the

"ApplicationSettings.xml" file for each Product Edition can contain some of the same settings, there

are some settings that are Edition specific (for example, some settings may only work for eRoom

Edition, so they will only be available in eRoom Edition). Any settings that are replicated through

various version of the file will only be applied to the specific Edition.

For example, the "AllowCheckResults" setting is available in every "ApplicationSettings.xml" file,

but it must be set on an individual Product Edition basis. Setting it for File Share Edition will not

configure it for eRoom Edition. The location of this file depends on the version of Windows:

· Microsoft Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 10 based systems

<Drive>:\Users\<USER>\AppData\Roaming\Metalogix\Metalogix Content Matrix Console -

<Product> Edition

· Microsoft Windows XP based systems (Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows

2003, and Windows XP)

<Drive>:\Documents and Settings\<USER>\Application Data\Application

Data\Metalogix\Metalogix Content Matrix Console - <Product> Edition

Page 243: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

243Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

Frequently Asked Questions

16

This section answers some of the most frequently asked questions about using Metalogix Content

Matrix.

Created Dates Not Retained

QuestionWe reviewed the upload process and observed that created date was not retained but all other

attributes (modified date, modified by and created by) were all correctly set. What could cause

this?

AnswerIn some cases customer try to set a created date that is more recent than the modified date. This is

not allowed by SharePoint. As a result, the created date will be set to the current date.

CSV Key Column

QuestionI am trying to import a Excel/CSV file and I am receiving the error "Aborting: Cannot find key

column." How do I designate a key column?

AnswerThe key column is required to uniquely identify a row. When you set up a Excel/CSV file for import,

it needs to have a SourceURL column or a MetalogixID column in order to import the file without

this message.

The SourceURL column can be used when importing content via Excel/CSV for the first time. Simply

add a new column called SourceURL to the file. The column can be left blank.

The MetalogixID column can be used for cases where some content has already been exported to

a Excel/CSV file, and is being re-imported after changes have been made to the original CSV.

Page 244: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

244Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

CSV Usage

QuestionI'm wondering how I can use Metalogix Content Matrix Console to help users bulk load their

existing files into a SharePoint site with their business specific data for each image, and ultimately

remove the files from the network share. I would like to provide for the users, perhaps on a

network folder basis, a CSV containing a list of file names and perhaps some of the attributes that

are identified during the import process, with the additional columns added to the CSV file, and

then they could update the CSV with the values per file. The users would hand the CSV back to me

for import to the SharePoint site using Metalogix Content Matrix Console - File Share Edition. I

would map the new columns to the SharePoint columns before the actual migration. The basic

steps would be:

· Import metadata from the file system into File Share Edition.

· Export that info to a CSV file.

· Modify the CSV to include the column headings and values for files to be uploaded to

SharePoint.

· Import the CSV into Metalogix Content Matrix Console with the updated metadata information.

· Migrate to SharePoint, mapping new columns from the CSV into SharePoint columns.

Can you let me know if the software is designed to work as I described above?

AnswerThis scenario is entirely supported by Metalogix Content Matrix Console. This scenario is also

supported for use with Import/Export using Excel.

Note: The CSV options are only available when Advanced Mode is enabled.

Evaluation Key Limitations

Question

What, if any, are the limitations for the Evaluation version of Metalogix Content Matrix?

Answer

There are some limitations for the evaluation versions of Metalogix Content Matrix. These

evaluation limitations/restrictions will vary depending on what version of Metalogix Content

Matrix is being used (Migration Express vs. the full version of Metalogix Content Matrix). The

scenarios and their limitations are:

Page 245: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

245Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

· Using Content Migration Express Edition - When using Metalogix Content Matrix Migration

Express Edition, users are limited to a migration total of 25GB of content. This means that users

can migrate up to a total of 25GB of content between all of the Editions that are included in

Migration Express (SharePoint, File Share, and Public Folder Editions). For example, if Metalogix

Content Matrix is used to run a migration of 12GB of content, then File Share is used to migrate

10GB of documents, and then Public Folder is used to migrate 3GB of data, then the total of

25GB (12+10+3=25) will have been reached and no further migrations can be run. Alternately, if

Metalogix Content Matrix is used to migrate 25GB of data, the limit will also be reached, and no

migrations can be run from File Share or Public Folder Editions.

· Using a Metalogix Content Matrix (full version) trial license key - When using a full version of

Metalogix Content Matrix (one that includes all Editions) users can have a trial license key. Trial

license keys are limited to a 10GB migration limit over a period of 30 days. The 10GB migration

limit works in the same way as the Express Editions migration limit size (see above), with the

exception that the key is only "good" for 30 days from the time of first activation.

General Limitation Questions

Question1. Is there a limit to the number of items you can be listed under a File Share Connection?

2. Is there a limit to the number of rows and columns that you can have in the File Share Edition?

3. Is there an expected amount of memory usage?

Answer1. This partly depends on the machine that is running the Metalogix Content Matrix Console.

Depending on the machine it is recommended to only go as high as 5000 items under a File

Share connection.

2. This is similar to the number of items. Since it is recommended to only go as high as 5000 items

under a File Share connection, and each item is the same as one row in the Items View tab, we

recommend to only go up to 5000 rows under a specific File Share connection. While there is no

limit to this for columns, since these are only related to rows in that it is information for items,

it would still be a good general rule to not exceed 5000 columns, but going over this should not

be an issue.

3. Metalogix Content Matrix Console uses an in memory Database (DB) for it's project files, so the

amount of memory used can get quite large depending on the number or rows and columns

that are included under the File Share connection. To help reduce the in-memory footprint any

long strings are stored in the DB, and not in the memory. Since each user's migration scenario is

different, we can't accurately give an expected amount of memory usage.

Page 246: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

246Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

Install MSI Error 2869

QuestionWhat is MSI error 2869? I am seeing this error when I try to install File Share Edition on Windows

Vista.

AnswerMSI Error 2869 is a common issue with MSI installations on Windows Vista.

"The installer has encountered an unexpected error installing this package. This may indicate a

problem with this package. The error code is 2869"

This error can occur when the User Access Control (UAC) feature of Windows Vista is enabled. If

you are defined as administrator on Vista, you are only temporary granted administrator privileges

when running programs. Therefore, MSI Custom Actions that interact with the system and require

administrative privileges will fail to run because MSI Custom Actions will impersonate by default.

A workaround is to run this command from a command line prompt (as an administrator): msiexec

/i MySetup.msi

License Key Troubleshooting

Question

I have been unable to get Metalogix Content Matrix to recognize my license key. When I copy and

paste it into the box, I get a "the specified license key is invalid" error.

Answer

Here are some things to check:

· Confirm that the license you are installing is for the correct application versions of Metalogix

Content Matrix. Contact Quest to verify that it is.

· When performing an offline key activation, make sure to enter the long key in its entirety,

including the "=" symbol at the end of it.

· Verify that you have write privileges to the registry. The installer will fail if the registry is locked.

In some cases there may be a group policy that is preventing the user from adding the key in the

registry, despite the user having the correct permissions.

Page 247: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

247Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

· Some versions of Windows will automatically block write access to the registry under the user

account, even if that account has write access to the registry. In this case you can go to the

application installation folder, right click on the application executable, and choose 'Run as

Administrator'. Then re-enter the license key.

Changing a Job Configuration for Multiple Files

Question

Is it possible to change the configuration for multiple job files at one time in the Job List section of

Metalogix Content Matrix?

Answer

Yes, this is possible. Most users will only need to change the configuration of a single job in the Job

List section, but it is possible to change the configuration for multiple jobs at one time.

In order to modify the configuration for multiple job files at one, select all of the jobs in the Job List

section. Once all of the desired jobs are selected there are two methods that can be used to access

the configuration dialog. The first is to click the Change Configuration button at the top of the Job

List, and the second method is to open the context (right-click) menu, and select the Change

configuration for selected jobs option.

The behavior for changing the configuration of multiple files at once changes slightly depending on

the version of Metalogix Content Matrix Console that is being used.

Behavior in Versions 6.1.00 and Later

When changing the configuration for multiple files that use the same type of action at once, only

settings that are changed during the re-configuration will be pushed into all of the selected jobs.

This means that even if all of the jobs contain different settings, they will all still contain these

different settings after the configurations have been modified. Only the settings that were re-

configured will be changed (to whatever setting they were changed to).

Let's look at the example of three "Paste Site" jobs that are previously configured, and each has a

different Rename action applied to it as well as a few various other differences in selected options.

When the Change Configuration is applied to all three at once, only the settings that were

reconfigured will be affected. So if the web part options were changed, then those options will be

applied to all three jobs, but each will still retain their original Rename setting, and any other

settings that were configured even if there are differences.

Behavior in Versions 6.0.0201 and Earlier

Page 248: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

248Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

When changing the configuration for multiple files that use the same type of action at once, all of

the selected files will have the options for the first job in the Job List section pushed into them,

regardless of any other setting the previously used. Basically, all of the jobs after the first select job

in the Job List will be modified to use all of the settings from the Change Configuration dialog.

Let's look at the example of three "Paste Site" jobs that are previously configured, and each has a

different Rename action applied to it as well as a few various other differences in selected options.

When the Change Configuration is applied to all three at once, all of the configuration options that

are set for the first of the selected jobs in the Job List will be pushed to the two remaining jobs.

These two remaining jobs would then use all of the exact same configuration options as the first

job, including the values for the rename options. Any of the previous settings for the two

remaining jobs would be lost (because they are replaced with the first jobs configuration options).

Multiple Clients

QuestionDoes Metalogix Content Matrix Console - File Share Edition support running multiple clients at the

same time?

AnswerMetalogix Content Matrix Console - File Share Edition does not currently support running multiple

migration actions at one time through a single instance of the client. However, it is possible to open

multiple copies of the client and have each one run a separate migration action. If multiple

instances of the client are opened at the same time to run migrations, users will need to make sure

that the source documents/folders are not being copied from the same location, and that the

selected target is not the same SharePoint list/site. If the source and target location overlap for

multiple concurrent migrations there is a possibility that the SharePoint APIs that are called by File

Share Edition will conflict and they will try to overwrite one another. As a result the migrated

content may not migrate correctly, and will have to be re-migrated at a later date.

Can I Use Multiple Filters in a Crawl?

QuestionDo you know if there is a way to add three or more filters, or item type specific filters, to the

crawled content. For example, when crawling content is there a way to generate one filtered list

that, uses some typical logical operators (i.e. AND, OR, >, <, etc)? For example, how would you

generate one spreadsheet where Tim is the author, the file is greater than 5 MB, older than 2005,

and the file can only be in .PDF, word 2007, or .TXT?

Page 249: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

249Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

Answer

Metalogix Content Matrix Console uses mainly inclusive filtering and not exclusive filtering. There

are some filters that can be added for some basic URL filtering, as well as filters that can be applied

to items.

For the filters that can be applied to items, these are only inclusive, but can be used to help narrow

down any content that is to be crawled. For example a filter can be set so that only .TXT files are

crawled. The filter itself is inclusive in nature, but is filtering out any other content if it isn't .TXT

format.

This being said, there are some other methods that can be used to achieve the desired results.

Method 1 - In the View tab, navigate to the top level folder that contains all of the desired content

that needs to be filtered and migrated. When the folder is selected, switch to the Items View tab.

Here, users can set any number of desired filters to the content within the folder(s). The Show

Items in Sub Folders button can be used to display any content within sub-folder, in case there is

any content in these folders that should also be migrated. Users can then click the Filter button to

add a filter to the Items View. Any number of filters can be added or removed using the Filter

button. After all of the desired filters have been added, users can migrate their desired content

from the Items View tab.

Method 2 - While Method 1 can be useful it can become complicated for filters that require more

specific results. This is where Method 2 comes be helpful. With this method you would crawl all of

the content, and then export it to CSV file. Please see the Working with CSV Files page for more

details. Once the CSV has been exported it can be opened in a spreadsheet application, and the

data can be manipulated to apply any desired filters. Then save it as a CSV file again. If users want

only this filtered content under the specific File Share connection, then there are two options

available. First would be to add a new File Share connection and import this modified CSV into the

new connection, and the second option would be to delete all the content from the existing File

Share connection, and then import the CSV back into the now empty connection node. For both

cases it is important to keep the values from the SourceURL or the MetalogixID from the inital

content import/export action. After the CSV has been imported into an empty connection node

users can migrate all of the content of that File Share connection, since it should now only list the

desired content.

Note: This method can also be performed with the Import/Export with Excel options.

SharePoint Metadata Delimiter

QuestionWhat is the appropriate way of importing metadata fields, that have multiple values, into

SharePoint 2007 or SharePoint 1210? Is there a proper format or delimiter that is needed?

Page 250: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

250Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

AnswerYes, there is a proper delimiter that should be used. ;# is the delimiter for multiple items on a

choice column. So if the desired result is "a;b" then users would enter ;#a;#b;# in the field, and

then map the column when migrating.

Source Files

QuestionI was wondering what happens to files on the share drive after we migrate them to SharePoint?

Are they marked or flagged on the share drive as having been migrated or are they deleted?

AnswerThe files on the file system are left as is. Metalogix Content Matrix Console - File Share Edition only

performs read operations on source files.

Your Metalogix Content Matrix Console - File Share Edition project is the best way to track what

has been migrated. We do provide a facility to remove the files from the source location post-

migration--if that is what you are looking for. Obviously, this is something to use carefully and we

would be happy to discuss further whether this might be useful in your case. Please contact Quest

Support for more information.

Using Proxies, Load Balancing or AlternateAccess Mappings

Question

How does Metalogix Content Matrix deal with environments that use proxies, load balancing

and/or alternate access mappings (AAM)?

Answer

Metalogix Content Matrix Console should not run into any issues with these three things.

Metalogix Content Matrix uses a Metalogix Extensions Web Service that deploys over a whole

farm, and functions identically to a regular SharePoint web service. SharePoint web service's get

the benefits of IIS redirection, proxy pushing, and anything else that SharePoint can utilize, such as

Alternate Access Mappings (AAM). Since the Metalogix Extensions Web Service acts the same as a

SharePoint web service it also gets all of these benefits.

Page 251: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

251Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

Basically, if you can access the regular native web services with all of your network configurations

active, then you should also be able to reach the Metalogix Extensions Web Service, and migrate

your content.

In the case for load balanced environments the Metalogix Extensions Web Service would need to

be deployed through the target side SharePoint farm. When the Web Service is installed it

automatically gets deployed to all the SharePoint instances within that farm, as a SharePoint

solution. Once the Web Service is installed on the target server, then load balancing should no

longer be an issue.

There are, however, some cases where proxy settings may not work correctly by default. In these

cases it is possible to set some specific proxy settings for the specified connection. Please see the

Configuring Proxy Settings page for more details, or the Manually Configuring Proxy Settings page

if the proxy settings need to be manually configured.

Content Matrix Console Generated XML Files

QuestionI want to manually edit an XML configuration file that was generated by Metalogix Content Matrix

Console but can't find it. Where should I look for the XML files?

AnswerXML files generated by Metalogix Content Matrix Console can usually be found under one of the

following locations:

Vista - C:\Users\[USER]\AppData\Roaming\Metalogix\Metalogix Content Matrix Console - File

Share Edition

XP - C:\Documents and Settings\[USER]\Application Data\Metalogix Software Corp\Metalogix

Content Matrix Console - File Share Edition

Whenever a feature that stores an XML configuration file is used for the first time, Metalogix

Content Matrix Console will create the XML file. These XML files can be edited manually if desired.

If users are looking for a specific XML file and can't find it in the specifiec location, it is possible that

it is the first time the feature is being accessed, so the file has not generated yet. Metalogix Content

Matrix Console will keep the XML data in memory until the application is closed, so after the client

is closed, the XML file will be generated in the folder

If choosing to edit one of the XML files, be sure to close the Metalogix Content Matrix Console first.

Then make the desired edit, and re-open Metalogix Content Matrix when ready. If the client is still

running when the desired changes are made, those changes will be overwritten when the client is

next closed.

A few examples of the more commonly used XML configuration files are:

· ActiveConnections.xml

· EnvironmentSettings.xml

Page 252: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

252Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

· JobHistorySettings.xml

· Settings.xml

SharePoint 2013 and 2016 Site CollectionCreation Issue

Question

I have been trying to create a new Site Collection in SharePoint 2013/2016 through Metalogix

Content Matrix but I have been encountering issues. Why is this happening? and what can I do

about it?

Answer

Starting with SharePoint 2013, most web applications use claims authentication, but the Central

Administration web application that manages the server level settings uses Classic authentication.

When Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to a SharePoint server it has to authenticate

through a web application. When connected to a SharePoint 2013 or 2016 web application that

uses Claims authentication, SharePoint itself can have trouble recognizing that the accessing User

account has permissions in the web application areas that are managed by Classic authentication.

This is also true if connected to a web application that uses Classic authentication, if trying to

access an area managed by Claims authentication.

In SharePoint 2013 and 2016, the permissions to create Site Collections is managed by Classic

authentication, so if connected through a Claims authentication web application users will receive

a "401 Unauthorized" error message when trying to create a new Site Collection. This happens

even if the user account has all of the appropriate permissions. If connecting through a Classic

authentication web application, users will receive permission errors when trying to set any settings

on a Site Collection that uses a Claims authentication web application, after the Site Collection is

created.

Page 253: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

253Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

From internal testing, we have determined that SharePoint 2013 connections thatuse the Local Object Model connection will not run into this issue. This is becausethe Local OM connection type does not run authentication through IIS, whichappears to be a trigger point for the authentication issues.

From testing we have also determined that you are still able to create SharePoint

2013 Site Collections when using the Remote OM connection type, but in order to

do this Metalogix Content Matrix Console must elevate your permissions for the

creation step. Before elevating any credentials, Metalogix Content Matrix Console

will run a preliminary check to ensure the migrating user has enough permissions

initially to be able to use the elevated Site Collection creation. In order for these

elevated permissions to be used, the migrating user account must explicitly (by

name) have "Full Control" permissions on the Web Application that the Site

Collection is being created on.

In the Remote OM connection case users can also create a Site Collection within

any web application if they are a member of the Farm Administrator group in

SharePoint and they are connected to Central Administration as a farm connection.

NOTE: All of the above is also true if you are migrating to a SharePoint 2010

environment that uses Claims authentication.

Possible Errors when Creating Site Collection in SharePoint 2013

Below is a list of errors (and their explanations) that you might encounter when trying to create

Site Collections in SharePoint 2013 through Metalogix Content Matrix Console.

· Error Message 1 - Unable to create a site collection using Self Service Site Creation under the

Administration Web Application.

Explanation/Resolution - The User is connected to the Central Administration web application

(using a farm or web connection type) and is trying to create a Site Collection using Self Service

mode. This is not allowed. You will need to use the Admin mode instead.

· Error Message 2 - Unable to obtain Web Application '<web application name>'.

Explanation/Resolution - Metalogix Content Matrix is unable to find the web application. This

should not occur unless a serious issue within SharePoint has occured from the time the Site

Collection configuration dialog was displayed, and the call to the Metalogix Extensions Web

Service (for remote OM connections) was made to perform the Site Collection creation. Check

your SharePoint environment, and resolve any issues. Then try again.

· Error Message 3 - Migrating user '<migrating user>' requires explicit Full Control on the web

application where the site collection is intented to be created. If the migrating user is a member

of the Farm Administrators group then connect to the Central Administration site and try again.

Explanation/Resolution - The migrating user has read permissions on the web application (using

a farm or web connection type) that they're connected to, but does not have full control on the

Page 254: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

254Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

web application that they are trying to create the Site Collection in. To resolve this, the migrating

user account must be added explicitly (by name) with Full Control to the respective Web

Application that they are trying to create the site collection in. They can also create a Site

Collection within any web application if they are a member of the Farm Administrator group in

SharePoint, and they are connected to Central Administration as a farm connection.

Job List Database fails to Load After Upgrade

Question

I recently upgraded to Metalogix Content Matrix Console version v.6.2.x.x and my Job List

database is failing to load. What might be causing this issue? and how can I fix it?

Answer

This issue was likely caused by a recent upgrade to Metalogix Content Matrix Console's security

features. A security upgrade has been made in Metalogix Content Matrix Console version 6.2.0.0

and later. This change has resulted in two potential issues that users can encounter. These issues

and their resolutions are:

· Issue 1: The Job List database failing to load.

Resolution: When the Metalogix Content Matrix Console client opens, an error message will

prompt the user to open the Job List file again. Go down to the Job List section and click File >

Open Job List. This will open a Browser window. Navigate to the location that contains the LST

file for the Job List that was previously listed in the Job List section. Then select the LST file and

click Open. The Job List will now be loaded and users can continue as normal.

Due to the security upgrades in version 6.2.0.0 and later, the security settings for the Job List

need to be upgraded. Metalogix Content Matrix Console cannot do this while the job is actively

selected, but can apply the update to the existing Job List the next time it is loaded back to the

Job List section of the client application.

· Issue 2: Any connections that have had the Save my credentials check box selected will no longer

have their passwords saved.

Resolution: For any connections that had their credentials previously saved by using the Save my

credentials option, you will need to connect or reconnect to that environment and enter the

password in again, then complete the connection. The security upgrade has caused the

encryption file for any saved passwords within Metalogix Content Matrix Console to be

upgraded, and to apply this upgrade to this file, any saved passwords must be re-entered.

Page 255: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

255Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

Migrating Empty Folders

QuestionIs it possible to migrate any empty folder within my File Share?

AnswerYes, it is possible to migrate any empty folders into SharePoint. By default any empty folders that

exist within the File Share folder structure will be migrated into the target SharePoint environment.

If the configuration options for the migration are set to determine the folder name (that each file

should be migrated into) based on the data in a custom column, then any empty folders will still be

migrated but they will ignore this setting and instead use the original empty folder name.

Retrying Failed Document Copies to O365 CSOMConnections

Question

When I try to migrate some of my content into O365 using a SharePoint CSOM or Office 365 Tenant

connection type, and this content contains a large Document Library, I see that some of my

documents fail to migrate. The logs for the failure indicate that a "HTTP 500 - Internal Server Error"

was thrown. What is the cause of this? And how can I fix it?

Answer

There is a potential issue when migrating specifically to O365 where users can encounter an "HTTP

500" error. This is caused by a combination of the CSOM/Tenant connection adapter and

SharePoint's document upload methods. To help resolve this issue there is a document retry

feature that can be configured. This retry feature will attempt to upload the document(s) into the

O365 target, and depending on the configured setting, will attempt to retry the upload process if it

fails or times-out on the initial try.

The below steps will explain how to enable and configure this retry setting.

NOTE: This retry method is only meant for migrating to O365 targets. If you are migrating to an

on-premise target, then this retry feature will not benefit you since it makes use of O365 specific

methods.

1. Make sure that the Metalogix Content Matrix client application is closed.

2. In the file system that the Metalogix Content Matrix Console client application is installed on,

navigate to the following folder location:

Page 256: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

256Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

· Microsoft Windows Vista and Windows 7 and Windows 2010 - <Drive>:

\ProgramData\Metalogix

· Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows 2003, and Windows XP- <Drive>:

\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Metalogix

3. In this location there should be an EnvironmentSettings.xml file. Open this file in an editor

program. For example, Notepad, etc.

4. There are two variables that will need to be modified in order for the retry method to work.

They are:

· CSOMDocumentRetriesNumber - This value determines the number of times that Metalogix

Content Matrix will make another attempt to upload/migrate any document(s) that has

failed the initial document upload try, when migrating to a O365 CSOM target.

· CSOMDocumentRetriesDelay - This value determines the amount of time, in seconds (s), that

Metalogix Content Matrix will wait before starting a document upload retry, and is based on

the above ("CSOMDocumentRetriesNumber") variable.

NOTE: The default values for these two variables will be set as "0". Users can set these values

as desired, based on what works best for their environment.

5. After the desired values have been entered in the two variables, save and close the file.

6. Restart the Metalogix Content Matrix client application. The changes should now be in

Metalogix Content Matrix Console, and used when running any migration to an O365 target

environment.

After these values have been set and the client application has been restarted, any documents that

fail on the initial migration attempt we be retried.

Azure Batches Getting Stuck

Question

I am migrating some content through the Azure SPO Pipeline. After some time the Azure batchesseem to simply stop. Why am I facing this issue?

Answer

Migration duration and overall performance using the Azure SPO Pipeline may vary due to factorsoutside the control of Metalogix Content Matrix. The pipeline that processes migration resideswithin Microsoft's domain and is subject to Microsoft's internal processes, such as maintenanceand upgrades.

Page 257: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

257Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

You may experience a delay of several hours before batch completion if the machines thatMicrosoft uses for the pipeline undergo maintenance/upgrades or if there are O365 serviceissues/outages (as can be seen in the O365 Admin Center under Service Health).

Migration Error Message 'There was an ErrorReading from the Pipe: The Pipe has been Ended(109, 0xd6)'

Question

I am migrating some content and getting the following error: Exception: There was an error

reading from the pipe: The pipe has been ended. (109, 0x6d).

What is this error? Why am I getting it? And how can I resolve it?

Answer

The error message is thrown due to a timeout on an internal call in Metalogix Content Matrix, and

users can resolve the issue.

When a user tries to run an action within the Metalogix Content Matrix client application, there are

some internal processes and calls that happen before Metalogix Content Matrix actually starts

sending data over to the target environment. The "There was an error reading from the pipe..."

message is caused when one of these internal calls/processes encounters a timeout issue as it is

moving the content, and results in the item failing to copy (or the setting failing to be configured).

This issue is mainly encountered when migrating to a target environment using a Client Side Object

Model (CSOM) connection type.

To resolve the issue, there are a set of four configurable timeout variables, which will prevent the

timeout issue from happening. These timeout variables are in the EnvironmentSettings.xml file.

The below steps will review which variables will need to be changed, and how to change them.

1. First, make sure that the Metalogix Content Matrix client application is closed. If it is currently

open, it will need to be closed before continuing.

2. Next, navigate to the EnvironmentSettings.xml file. Please see the Configuration Variables Files

page for more details on accessing this file.

Page 258: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

258Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

3. Open the EnvironmentSettings.xml file in an editor program (like NotePad, etc.). There are a

set of four values that can be edited to help resolve the "There was an error reading from the

pipe..." message, and all four of these variables should be changed. They are:

a. PipeCloseTimeout - The default Metalogix Content Matrix value for this setting is 15

minutes.

b. PipeOpenTimeout - The default Metalogix Content Matrix value for this setting is 15

minutes.

c. PipeReceiveTimeout - The default Metalogix Content Matrix value for this setting is 20

minutes.

d. PipeSendTimeout - The default Metalogix Content Matrix value for this setting is 15

minutes.

NOTE: All four of these variables are set in minutes.

While it is possible to set the Metalogix Content Matrix default values to be lower, it is not

recommended, especially if the "There was an error reading from the pipe..." message is

returned. However, in the case that users want to lower these values they can only be reduced

as far down as the Microsoft default values. These are 1, 1, 10, and 1 respectively.

4. Set the values for the four fields to be higher than the Metalogix Content Matrix default values.

Then save and close the EnvironmentSettings.xml file.

5. Restart the Metalogix Content Matrix client application and run the migration again. If the four

variable settings have been set high enough, the error message "There was an error reading

from the pipe: The pipe has been ended. (109, 0x6d)" should no longer be thrown.

Error Making a Browser-Based Connection withPowerShell Console Open

Question

Why do I get a "Manual Reconnection Required" error when I try to run a Metalogix Content

Matrix job using PowerShell?

Answer

This error would occur if you used the Metalogix Content Matrix Console to connect to a

SharePoint target with Web Browser Authentication while the PowerShell console is open. To

avoid this issue, take the following steps:

1. Make sure that the PowerShell console is closed at the time you make a target connection via

the Metalogix Content Matrix Console when Web Browser Authentication is used.

Page 259: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

259Frequently Asked Questions

Content Matrix

NOTE: After entering your credentials, be sure to check the Remember my Password box, as

credentials must be stored in the Credential Manager vault before the connection is made.

2. After you have created your PowerShell job, close the Metalogix Content Matrix Console.

NOTE: At this point, it is recommended that you remove your Web Browser Authentication

credentials from Windows Credential Manager. You will be prompted to re-enter them when

the PowerShell job is run.

3. Launch the PowerShell console and run the job.

4. When prompted, re-enter the credentials you used to connect via the Metalogix Content

Matrix Console. (Again, remember to check the Remember my password box.)

Page 260: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

260About Us

Content Matrix

About Us

17

We are more than just a nameWe are on a quest to make your information technology work harder for you. That is why we build

community-driven software solutions that help you spend less time on IT administration and more

time on business innovation. We help you modernize your data center, get you to the cloud

quicker and provide the expertise, security and accessibility you need to grow your data-driven

business. Combined with Quest’s invitation to the global community to be a part of its innovation,

and our firm commitment to ensuring customer satisfaction, we continue to deliver solutions that

have a real impact on our customers today and leave a legacy we are proud of. We are challenging

the status quo by transforming into a new software company. And as your partner, we work

tirelessly to make sure your information technology is designed for you and by you. This is our

mission, and we are in this together. Welcome to a new Quest. You are invited to Join the

Innovation™.

Our brand, our vision. Together.Our logo reflects our story: innovation, community and support. An important part of this story

begins with the letter Q. It is a perfect circle, representing our commitment to technological

precision and strength. The space in the Q itself symbolizes our need to add the missing piece —

you — to the community, to the new Quest.

Contacting Quest

For sales or other inquiries, visit www.quest.com/contact.

Page 261: File Share Edition - Quest · Metalogix Content Matrix Console connects to any SharePoint site that you can access with your browser, even those outside your organization's intranet.

261About Us

Content Matrix

Technical Support Resources

Technical support is available to Quest customers with a valid maintenance contract and

customers who have trial versions. You can access the Quest Support Portal at

https://support.quest.com

The Support Portal provides self-help tools you can use to solve problems quickly and

independently, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. The Support Portal enables you to:

· Submit and manage a Service Request

· View Knowledge Base articles

· Sign up for product notifications

· Download software and technical documentation

· View how-to-videos

· Engage in community discussions

· Chat with support engineers online

· View services to assist you with your product